Home

R&S VSE-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

1. 63 e Adjusting Settings Automatically esee em 68 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the Analog Demodulation application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For details on which settings are defined and an overview of predefined standards see chapter A 3 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 243 Digital standard settings are available via the Setup Standard button in the Over view EE le E Tee ME EN L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Eiles e 31 Ga MAMNIPOUIM E T EE RUPEE 31 Dec ol MENTRE OQ mmm 31 Configuration According to Digital Standards E MG 32 L Delete Standard 32 L Restore Standard Eiles sess nn nn 32 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file The predefined set tings are configured in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measurements Drive C OS 7 Path Ademod 7 Files Size Load O AM Broadcast xml 2kB QO FM Broadcast xml 2kB IT FM Narrowband xml 2kB 0 Frequency Settling xml 1kB 0 none xml 141 File Name Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Setup Standard Select the storage location of the
2. 37 Analog Demodulation lu e eec 66 Output settiligs reet eren erit reas 66 Analysis Marker fu nctioris eren ete 90 Remote control 187 E 71 AQT seeMeasu rement time rne nns 9 ASCII trace export E Attenuation areae erre rena eren ein e ch ee ine r PRO C Displayed Electronic Manual 9 oi o Re Audio frequency SOGAP M T E 11 Auto adjustment Triggered measuremient ener 157 AAutoall tees Auto frequency Auto level abii C 70 Reference level eer neret i eid 39 69 Ce SCALING EE 61 62 Auto settings Meastlme tmode nec i teer renda 69 Average COUN ien sr eile 48 74 Average mode Ico c4 73 Averaging Traces remote cohitrol cic 163 B SET Hr ET ne 46 C Capture Gol Geer eee err eer c Points Settings Carrier EE eege tee Eed 18 22 ROWE eer 18 CCIR filter Pim 57 CCITT filter E 57 Center frequency 41 54 Automatic configuration sesssssseee 68 Displayed DER 9 10 e EE 42 Closing Windows remote ssssssssssss 172 176 178 Color curve Shape NR RR 28 79 Spectrogram S s c eroe Rege prete Reno o P e FIR IU ERU S 28 Color mapping Ore Fo Tu e UTR S EE TETTE ETT 79 Color range 78
3. INPUT IMP ert lei tg Esos BD pude S 174 Es fertis ie amoto paie Brot e 175 EAYout GEOBaL ADDEWINDONW tnit tac erint cit ertt nec ete tte ertet eet e nette teet tente teens 170 EAYout GEOBal CATalog WINDOW 5 5 222 m rr ieri tre eerie orte Etre etes 171 EAYout GEOBaEIDENtfyEWINDOW ui a rust reote tent aote rne etra een eene 172 EAYout GEOBal REMOVSEWINDOW xit ertet rettet trn ett Moet nete Dn 172 LAYOUt ERT E 176 BS fo aupra 177 LAYoutWINDowsn IDEN fy9 cuite cator ptite te ertet rp pee tate neat 177 EAYout WINDOWS REMOVE E LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace MMEMory STOResn gt UIS Teirin inau enea tarr SENE Fad aAa TONENE ETNE ENES RENIN TENANE NAATA VIET MMEMON e ET MMEMory STORG lt n gt SPEC regen eege ERKENNEN EE rr eter Y n seacestdavees I PEE Eee 182 MMEMory STOResn TRAGS iir enrich tr rr ren en een rate e E ROPA PETE E EE ERR EFE R ERR ER EYE FEES RE RAE 182 OUTPUEADEMod ON Line AF CFRequehoy sxn cornetto p nur te t tenere re pt x rrt enr rn 122 OUTPU tADEMoOd ONLime P EONGS tert tdt rtp iae ete eer etu ge ce or e ne dud OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURCce OUTPUEADEMoO ONkine STAT cct torus rota e E E EOE ETE Eege geren OUTPut TRIGgersport DIRGC
4. esee nnne nnn 68 SER un tt 71 6 1 Trace Settings oer ee Eeer 71 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration eese nnn 74 6 3 Spectrogram Settings reete enti ANE Een Ian E XE RR REO HEISE ERST REUS 76 6 4 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 79 6 5 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 94 66 Zoom F nctlons ertet herein teen EE ed 106 User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 3 7 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Appli Il eee d E eer nrc er 108 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 110 9 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 111 HI INO diiJ 112 9 2 Common SUMPIXCS weit ccccciccccecsteccecccsctieceseccteeceescuntee ces ceateeccssencctecessaseteecessssteesseessietecs 116 9 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements eene 117 9 4 Configuring the Measurement eese nennen nnne nnn nennt 117 9 5 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeeeeenennennnenen nennen nnne nnns 169 9 6 Retrieving Results nenne rentes in NANNAN rins nR frin nean NESANA 179 9 7 Analyzing Results eie ntes ieetenni sii En ano ia Ese suse PE EMANARE ESSES 187 9 8 Programming Examplo cese noon nennen tuin tt
5. 49 Clear el EE 49 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation Remote command SENSe ADEMod n MTIMe on page 131 Points This value defines the number of trace points that are evaluated and displayed in the result diagrams Note The capture settings are window specific For some result displays the points may not be editable as they are determined automatically or restrictions may apply Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 135 Capture Count Defines the number of times data is captured in single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The capture count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if capture count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweep For capture count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed For spectrogram displays the capture count determines how many captures are com bined in one frame in the spectrogram i e how many captures the R amp S VSE performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display For more details see chapter 4 5 1 Time Frames on page 26 Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 162 Selecting a frame to display Selects a
6. PUG NETT IEEE Ee eege 101 un E E 101 MGS ORGS ascites ce E Et 102 EIE DE 102 KEE 102 hi CREE UI LORI 102 DAS OMS EE 103 ISSN EE 103 Delete UE 103 SU qq 103 vis H 103 icc Mm 103 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 222 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line The text may contain up to 40 charac ters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent on page 217 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer THReshold on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold on page 224 Margin Defines a margin for the limit line The default setting is 0 dB i e no margin Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin on page 220 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin on page 222 X Axis Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Domain Hz for frequency domain
7. Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 19 Demodulation Process 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Analog Demodula tion measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings e Demodulation Process 20 e Demodulation Bandwidih nennen 22 NECI CRITTU LEE 23 e Time Domain ZoOIh ceci rre a EERSTEN 23 e Working with SpectrograMs nennen nnns nnns 24 4 1 Demodulation Process The demodulation process is shown in figure 4 1 All calculations are performed simul taneously with the same UO data set Magnitude amplitude and phase of the com plex UO pairs are determined The frequency result is obtained from the differential phase For details on general UO data processing in the R amp S VSE refer to the reference part of the UO Analysis remote control description in the R amp S VSE User Manual Demodulation Process Software demodulator Trace RF spectrum mx pct Eg Bee AF spectrum x nen trace aaa modulation LH AF trigger calculation frequency i lowpass carrier AM demodulator PX power LL vero T Trace Inter Trace RF power Arithmetic polation Detector trace weg modulation frequency Q data Trece Inter Trace peak pea
8. ssseeee 10 Digital standards COnDTIgUratiOn ute cec toco eee a Dee De en nete e DIN ded 30 VSAmeasuremiehls e ro ee tt eiie 30 Drop out time lee GT 45 E Electronic input attenuation iot ir eot rn 40 Errors IF OVED 38 Evaluation D ta E 11 Methode 11 Evaluation methods ue 170 174 Examples Remote GOHttol EE 232 Export format Uc mc 245 Exporting ek EC E 74 Measurement settings A 75 Pak iSt oio at ene tite ond 93 Traces 74 75 External ttigget eret ret rtr nter tne 44 Level remol rene mnt rne 137 F File format Export FILES ENT 245 Trace e 2 a E e nin eee 245 File name E e S es an guetta aaian seats toute testes 31 Filters A weighted AF tcc itecto ctt reinen 57 im diaevateneh CCIR AF CCITT AE iine i rne inset ee din ex dn DenmodulatiQni scii tuo rne rti crabe n ne High pass AF High pass remote A 119 High pass RF Input ets 36 Low pass AF s Weighting AF YIG remote tio een Ec pid tees Fixed reference eu Lull RE 84 Marker onnenn eosi ra c chri riora aS dee EENS 87 Remote control 5 acea carter sinas 208 FM Spectrum Evaluation method 2 5 ii ceci tria 14 FM Time Domain Evaluation method ege i aei cera 12 Format pic c m 245 Data P6MOte nettement 181 183 see also File format cccccsssceceees
9. the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 38 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 39 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 39 9 4 6 2 Configuring the Attenuation IN cacao dea oet ruo abeo nee e EE 126 INPUtATTenialon AUT e EE 127 lude EORNM 127 NPU EATTAUTO M 128 INPuEBEATTISTATB iai te rua tus eee e re eaae cemento ea Nadie ev eee tis eb ER med 128 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total
10. cessere 128 e SSCA WAS NANS eec ete n es nacer ree tee e p nu addas 129 Amplitude Settings Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence ceseeseeeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nnn 125 ter ass Ee ERR 125 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel sees eene 125 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzvltSCALelbRlEVelOEtzGet nenen en er nreeererene 126 SENS JADJust L EVel inna AT A AERE INN 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 39 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by
11. reticent 18 Depth Scalitg terrre meret 59 Frequency 18 22 Multiple ZOOM x rettet nene nenne 106 N n dB down D lta valle tni e erc edite ate 94 EI CIE 88 94 REMOTE COMMON es cnc titi eet o ERR Res 213 Name Bug H Next MINIMUM 22 m treat anidan Marker positioning a Next Peak 2 meon ited nav sduen casts ces nre i decidere Marker positioning Noise BE CERE UD 89 EI E 89 i e 64 O Offset Limit HE 96 Reference level oce craters 39 Options Electronic atteriuatlon c rr tenentis 40 High pass E 36 119 Output Analog Demodulation geseet rnt tren 66 Analog Demodulation remote 121 122 Configuration Noise source Settings Trigger Overview Configuration KT rrr trente 32 P Peak excursion once eias ta ne Ein do icd oaa 85 93 Peak list elt le Diet WE ER Sei 92 Evaluation method sssssseeeeeeee 19 Exporting Marker Numbers 2 5 conti ciis EEN Deg 93 Maximum number of peaks sene 93 Remote control is SOM IMOGE MS icis Peak search ll 85 Reference marker uersa t asa csa asa se cesa oinnia 84 Peaks Marker positionilig ecrit t tette 86 NOX m Q 87 Performing Analog Demodulation measurement 108 Persistence spectrum SDGGIIOGQF ali icai iie a Fe
12. TRAC DATA TRACE2 Retrieve the averaged trace data for all 30 measurements trace 2 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 Menu Reference A Reference A 1 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 Menu Reference Most functions in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application are available from the menus Common R amp S VSE MENUS 2 eee eee er lcd aaa 235 e Analog Demodulation Menus essen enne 237 Common R amp S VSE Menus The following menus provide basic functions for all applications e Ele Nen eo tectum Mui dave ADM Rae erts pee Lt E 235 Brea cil Ct 236 e Help MCR e edi ete d ee co ada ed i d e E 237 File Menu The File menu includes all functionality directly related to any file operations printing or setting up general parameters For a description of these functions see the Data Management chapter in the R amp S VSE User Manual Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Save B Saves the current software configuration to a file Recall m Recalls a saved software configuration from a file Saves the recorded UO data from a measurement channel to a file Save IQ Recording Recall IQ Recording Loads the recorded UO data from a file Measurement Group gt Configures measurement channels and groups
13. eese nennen nennen 149 SENSe JADEModsn SPECtrm TYPE icto tr tete re pesa ead ae toe Pee Ecce khe heh OR KDE eres 161 SENSe ADEModsn S QUelch LEVel itr orn ttn ner che t rtr RE te een HEP A Ra e eoe d 145 SENSe ADEModsn SQUelch STATe i isi rint teret e rii teer oe A 144 SENSE ADEMO d N gt EE 133 SENSe ADEModxn ZOONMELENGLIh ioo e reete eni rin eto rri re e ATENA EE nra rea PER UE aen 145 SENSe ADEMod n 7 ZOOMELENGIFi MODE 2 it rente tih ra etre ee ee Rn the sa Pene EP ERE 145 SENSe JADEModsri ZOOM STARU irpan na a a acad n vec i ED ea esie ane tes SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe SENSE IERT M SEN eet Egger Oe SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 2 nero enn tnit titt rn AVEVA SENATEN EENEN 156 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer eet netter rtr tnnt hn aea rh rh Ren Enna 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure H YS Tleresis UPPer irr reap err e UR Ee EENS 157 SENSe JADJust CONFigure TRIG 5 5 aer rain eene eor Pete nen ERE res FERE ea CH Fe E EE TER e e kn alea Ye ERENS Eaa 157 SENSe ADJust F REQuency SENSe ADJ st LEVEL iri oi tr etie rnt rer vec n e Eee e REY E ERE REX EEN E ERE YER SENSE pA da2u E O TIRER EN SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO GONTinUOUS oecos coena eot eu tre eee dope tern re 158 SENSe JAVER3ag6esti s ee TE 162 SENSe AVERadg6es
14. Analog Demod 2 Marker Table Wnd Type Ref Tre Function ndB 999 999051 MHz 3 ndB down BW 1 2 1 000000999 GHz Q Factor Fig 6 2 n dB down marker function The following marker function results are displayed Table 6 1 n dB down marker function results Label Description M1 Current position and level of marker 1 ndB Offset value n dB down SS eee User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 88 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Label Description ndB down Bw Determined bandwidth or pulse width zero span at the offset PWid Q factor Quality factor of the determined bandwidth characteristic of damping or resonance T1 T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displayed as a result 6 4 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier it creates frequencies next to the carrier frequency A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measure ments at defined offsets from the carrier the results are given in relation to the carrier level dBc In the Analog Demodulation application phase noise measurement markers are avail able for the AF Spectrum result displays For the FM Spectrum and PM Spectrum result displays the phase deviation in rad equals the phase noise at the marker posi t
15. This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 40 9 4 6 3 Configuring the Measurement INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 40 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 40 Configuring a Preamplifier INPUEGA INES TA MEss oin a E E I 128 INPUUGAINE VALUG hae 129 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on the instrument in use on and off It requires the additional preamplifiier hardware option on the connected instrument Depending on the instrument in use the pream
16. Trigger Source Settings d Optionally the trigger signal used by the R amp S VSE can be output to a connected device and an external trigger signal from a connected device can be used by the R amp S VSE The trigger input and output settings are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 64 Trigger settings are identical to the base unit except for the available trigger sources For background information on trigger settings trigger output and working with external triggers see the R amp S VSE User Manual The trigger source settings are configured in the Trigger Source tab of the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Analog Demodulation Overview Trigger In Out Source Ext Trigger 1 m Level 14V Drop OutTime 0 0s Offset 005 Slope Falling Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff as B EN Beete e m 43 dli 1 UMP 44 t Eten TOi cien Ada SERA 44 L Le TE A4 L Magnitude COMMING iac racc ioi cnn e va aden tain sisestbeetbie 44 I o E E A E ataeseaton 44 xi EN 44 Megk2T 45 Msc PLI 45 ucl MH 45 FORA aD PS 45 Soo Hn 46 get ee EP 46 Trigger Source In the Analog Demodulation application the next measurement can be triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level s
17. s for time domain e Scaling mode absolute or relative Hz s 96 values For relative values the frequencies are referred to the currently set center fre quency In the zero span mode the left boundary of the diagram is used as the ref erence e Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 224 CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer MODE on page 220 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain on page 218 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level unit e Scaling mode absolute or relative dB values Relative limit values refer to the reference level Limit type upper or lower limit values must stay above the lower limit and below the upper limit to pass the limit check Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 224 6 5 3 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Data points Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and value y value Data points must be defined in ascending order The sam
18. 5 5 rrr re rrt 104 Copying 100 104 Creatia EE 100 105 Data e TC 103 Deactivating 100 Rut ae E M 103 Deleting ee 100 105 Deleting values 1er ees 103 D tails rer rt erc nr tenens 100 soif 100 104 Inserting vali s c ttm 103 OI UE 98 Margin Margins Name Ge eur Remote Control E ege 217 Saving 103 EU S 99 Shifting S Hl nee DEE 96 102 Traces View filter MIOIAUOM eR Visibility Lines Config latiOti ET 97 Limit see Limlit linis 2 205 uitio tor eerte 97 Linking Markers iiis ritmi eet veni 82 84 85 Loading Settings fles iiie ers 31 Low pass filter AF TGS m 57 Lower Level Hysteresis eo ette 70 M Margins Limit lines dieit te nee sa ena to nna c 95 102 wei ER 96 Marker functions DJeactivalilg ec iere ten rea e D oto aes Remote control Marker peak list see Peak isl cerit etn ente eei 92 Marker table Evaluation method cs rre here en 18 Marker to RE 82 Markers Assigned Tace isnon Basic settings Configuration sse Configuration remote Control 188 RT Tele BE 83 Delta markers w 82 Fixed teference u ceci c tecto nr OR entren oed 87 Fixed reference remote control 194 208 Function conflgaratlon ic eco eerte ti renes 89 Linked in AF spectrum display su DD Linked intime domain
19. Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 93 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CAL Culate nz M bkermmzEUNGCHonNDBDown 213 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuenoy sese 214 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonNDBDowpn OEACtor eee 214 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonNDBDown REGu 214 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzFUNGCHonNDBDown STATe nennen nan 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME c ccccccseseceesececeesceeseeeeseeeees 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB For a positive offset the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point For a negative offset for example for notch filter measure ments the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active ref erence point RST 6dB Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the frequency domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a compl
20. This menu is application specific Table 1 1 Input menu items for Analog Demodulation Menu item Description Amplitude chapter 5 3 2 Amplitude on page 37 Scale chapter 5 6 4 Scaling on page 58 Frequency chapter 5 3 3 Frequency on page 41 Trigger chapter 5 4 Trigger Source Settings on page 42 Input Source chapter 5 3 1 1 Radio Frequency Input on page 35 Output chapter 5 7 Output Settings on page 63 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu provides access to most measurement specific settings as well as bandwidth sweep and auto configuration settings and the configuration Over view window This menu is application specific Table 1 2 Meas Setup menu items for Analog Demodulation Menu item Description AF Filter time domain only chapter 5 6 3 AF Filter on page 55 Demod chapter 5 6 1 Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod on page 50 Spectrum spectrum results only chapter 5 6 2 Demodulation Spectrum on page 52 Unit chapter 5 6 5 Units on page 62 Bandwidth chapter 5 5 1 Bandwidth Settings on page 46 Capture chapter 5 5 2 Capture Settings on page 47 Overview chapter 5 2 Configuration Overview on page 32 Trace Menu The Trace menu provides access to trace specific functions See chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 71 This menu is application specific Reference of Toolbar Functions Table 1 3 Trace
21. DB Sets the unit to percent or DB for the calculation of the THD in the Result Summary Remote command UNIT n THD on page 155 Output Settings OUDUE SENGS 1 sees 63 e Analog Demodulation Output Gettnges netrn net 66 Output Settings The R amp S VSE can control the output provided by the instrument in use to special con nectors for other devices For details on the output connectors refer to the instrument s Getting Started manual Output settings can be configured via the Input amp Output Output menu item Which output settings and connectors are available depends on the instrument in use Output Settings IF Video Output IF Out Frequency soo MHz Noise Source o eB Trigger 2 Output Trigger 3 E Output FMDEQDEMOD OUUU sidere tou ane rte arde re peter rec tesa ete tepore 64 IF OUt ene 64 ioi sls Po 64 IQ GCE 2h Oe E 64 ROT o RN ae eeneg 65 L bevel CL 65 E Pulse Leng ECT a a 65 EE Eos DNE 65 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is currently not available IF Out Frequency This function is currently not available Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the instrument in use on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the instrument in use itself for example when measuring the noise level of a D
22. This command activates deactivates the A weighting filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 57 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT AWE ON Activates the A weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 57 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters for the selected evaluation off Usage Setting only Manual operation See Deactivating all AF Filters on page 58 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe State This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 57 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR WEIG ON Activates the weighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 57 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter in the specified win dow For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 57 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR UNW ON Activates the unweighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 57 Configuring the Measurement SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT State This command activates deactivates the CCITT CCITT P 53 weighting filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see
23. This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically Analyzing Results Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 Manual operation See Shift y on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing lt InterpolT ype gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LiNear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 102 See Y Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 222 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 99 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines The R amp S VSE uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n
24. gt New Group Inserts a new group in the measurement sequence gt New Measurement Inserts a new channel in the selected group Channel Replaces the currently selected channel by the selected applica tion gt Replace Measure ment Channel gt Delete Current Mea Deletes the currently selected channel surement Channel Menu Reference Menu item Correspond ing icon in toolbar Description gt Measurement Group Setup Displays the Measurement Group Setup tool window Instruments gt Configures instruments to be used for input to the R amp S VSE soft ware gt New Creates a new instrument configuration gt Search Searches for connected instruments in the network gt Delete All Deletes all current instrument configurations gt Setup Hides or displays the Instrument tool window Preset gt Restores stored settings gt All Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire software gt All amp Delete Instru ments Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire software and deletes all instrument configurations gt Selected Channel Restores the default software configuration for an individual channel gt Reset VSE Layout Restores the default layout of windows toolbars etc in the R amp S VSE software Preferences gt Configures global software settings
25. iint rn 84 Bp TE 82 MINIMUM sis coa tine s 07 Minimum remote control m 204 D OB GOWN p 88 94 n dB down remote control sssssss 213 Next minimum wil Next minimum remote control 204 Nexb DOAK iiss iiit entra ducere tenerent ride aepo eo eaten Next peak remote control ze le POA gm Peak remote control Peak list remote control eren Phase noise measurement Phase noise measurement remote control 216 Position 4 82 ST le Une EE 86 Positioning remote control Querying position remote Remote control 187 Search settings remote 203 Setting up remote control 188 Spectrograms remote control 195 Stale c um 81 Step Size nce 84 Step size remote control 194 Mable 1 522 aee 2 09 Table evaluation method ssssssss 18 Table remote control 194 Type ipee eet 82 UE ER Maximizing Spectrogram remote A 167 Windows remole i creer rrr erepti tenes 167 Measurement time 47 48 Auto setting Sosaria tie a stop ode 69 Displayed e 9 Minn iiie CH Marker positioning vn OF D ET 87 MKR gt y 86 MKR FUNCT KEY 89 Modulation Depth e
26. log Demodulation Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an Analog Demod ulation measurement with the R amp S VSE K7 option 1 Open a new channel or replace an existing one and select the Analog Demod application 2 Select the Meas Setup gt Overview menu item to display the Overview for an Analog Demodulation measurement 3 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 4 Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal e Demodulation Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be demodulated e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be measured e Resolution Bandwidth how precise the signal is to be demodulated 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an offline demodulation trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Demodulation Settings button to define demodulation parameters for each evaluation e Configure the Squelch function on the Demod tab to suppress noise dur ing demodulation e Fortime domain evaluations zoom into the areas of interest by defining a zoom area on the Demod tab e For AF evaluations use special filters to eliminate certain effects of demodula tion or to correct pre emphasized modulated signals on the AF Filters
27. nett ite tte R 169 e Fanem Resulle cos etre e n to dre Diet e IR e rte ce dn d Ex Y ad un 179 Analyzing RESUS REO E 187 Programming vie EE 232 R amp S VSE K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 9 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S VSE Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not
28. ter 9 7 1 6 Configuring Special Marker Functions on page 208 o The Fixed Reference Marker settings are described in Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 e Phase Noise Measurement Marke 90 Marker Peak List Configuration cote bet bett tt eme ed e irte ron 92 e ndB Down E EE 93 e De activating All Marker F ngctlons tre P rte piena 94 Phase Noise Measurement Marker For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated Phase noise measurement markers are configured in the Phase Noise Config dialog box using the Phase Noise function Note that phase noise markers are only available for spectrum results not for time domain results and only for normal markers The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Phase Noise Config dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the Phase Noise button Select Phase Noise Config Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application e Select the Marker gt Marker Function menu item then select Phase Noise and switch to the Phase Noise Config tab Phase Noise Config Traces Phase Noise pea out
29. CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult suse 185 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t 185 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 185 CAL Culate nzM AbkerzmFUNGCHon ADEMod THDREGultets nenen ennnen reereeereree 186 SENSe TADEModsns FM OFESGLIU T citur dE EERSTEN ee 186 SENSe JADEMod n x PMIRPOIBIEX tue tado ec rhon e eee ru ene aa nde ER e year Rege arenae 187 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult This command queries the modulation audio frequency for the demodulation method in the selected window lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ModFreq gt Modulation frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the current value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same evaluation method have the same traces thus the window is irrelevant lt m gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Posti
30. Dynamically switches to the currently selected window If a win dow is selected that does not contain a time domain result dis play the selection is ignored and the previous setting is main tained Example OUTP ADEM ONL SOUR AnalogDemod OR DISP WIND1 SEL OUTP ADEM SOUR FOC Manual operation See Output Selection on page 66 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency Frequency This command defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 144 Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 10 Hz to DemodBW 10 300 kHz for active demodulation output RST 100 Hz Example OUTP ADEM ONL AF CFR 100Hz Manual operation See AC Cutoff Frequency on page 67 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes lt State gt In addition to sending the output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S VSE it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector CAUTION To protect your hearing make sure that the volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled both general online demod output OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 121 and this command adjust the volume setting Configuring the Measurement Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM PHON ON Manual opera
31. Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 73 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SELect This command selects the trace specified by the index lt t gt in the window specified by the index lt n gt Only traces that are active in the specified result display can be selected The selected trace is used to determine the Result Summary for the corre sponding result display see Result Summary on page 17 The query returns the number of the currently selected trace in the window specified by the index lt n gt trace index is ignored Traces can only be queried for graphical result displays not Result Summary Marker Table or Peak Marker List Return values lt TraceNo gt Number of the currently selected trace Example DISP TRAC3 SEL Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain TYPE
32. Marker instead of another marker The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence marker Alternatively a Peak Search can be performed to set the current maximum value of the trace assigned to marker 1 as the fixed reference marker Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe on page 209 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 209 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 208 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 208 Link Time Marker Links the markers in all time domain diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 195 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Link AF Spectrum Marker Links the markers in all AF spectrum displays Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 195 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 9 7 1 Working
33. SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 36 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 36 Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 36 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 35 See Unit on page 39 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S VSE 9 4 4 Configuring the Measurement Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector FIQ IO data file RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 35 See I Q File State on page 37 Configuring the Output Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 9 4 8 2 Configuring the T
34. SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum TYPE lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt TraceMode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt This command selects the trace modes of the evaluated signal to be measured simul taneously For each of the six available traces a mode can be defined The trace modes are configured identically for all windows with a specific evaluation lt n gt is irrelevant The following table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method Command syntax Evaluation method AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum FM TDOMain FM time domain FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum PM TDOMain PM time domain PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum SPECtrum RF spectrum Note The trace modes for each trace and each window can also be configured individ ually using the DISP TRAC MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t MODE on page 159 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Capture Count determines the number of averaging proce dures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace
35. See Set to Default on page 79 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor LOWer lt Percentage gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer Percentage This command defines the starting point of the color map Parameters lt Percentage gt Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit Example DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 10 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 78 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor SHAPe Shape DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe Shape This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters lt Shape gt Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Shape on page 79 9 5 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor UPPer Percentage DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 Example DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 9596 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 78 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt This command selects the color scheme Parameters lt ColorScheme gt HOT
36. WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window Configuring the Result Display Usage Event LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow lt ExChannelName gt lt WindowName gt lt NewChannelName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow command Parameters lt ExChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel in which a window is to be replaced The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow query lt NewChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel for which a new win dow will be created lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window Note that the window type must be valid for the specified chan nel lt NewChannelName gt See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY GLOB REPL WIND IQ Analyzer 1 AnalogDemod MTAB Replaces the UO Analyzer res
37. button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 142 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 142 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 143 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 143 Output Settings 5 7 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings The demodulated signal in time domain results can be output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the instrument in use The following settings and functions are available to configure the output in the Analog Demodulation application They can be configured in the Output dialog box in the Analog Demod tab Note that the audio frequ
38. domain RST ABSolute CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Analyzing Results Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Distance Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Manual operation See Shift x on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing lt InterpolMode gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolMode gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the
39. gt General gt Displayed Items Hides or shows individual screen elements gt Theme amp Color Configures the style of individual screen elements gt Network amp Remote Configures the network settings and remote access to or from other devices gt Recording Configures general recording parameters Print Opens Print dialog to print selected measurement results Exit Closes the R amp S VSE software A 1 1 2 Window Menu The Window menu allows you to hide or show individual windows For a description of these functions see the Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data chapter in the R amp S VSE User Manual Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Player Displays the Player tool window to recall UO data recordings Instrument Setup Displays the Instruments window to configure input instruments A 1 1 3 A 1 2 Menu Reference Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Measurement Group Displays the Measurement Group Setup window to configure a Setup measurement sequence New Window gt 5 Inserts a new result display window for the selected measure ment channel Channel Infos gt Displays the channel bar with global channel information for the selected meausrement channel Active Windows gt Selects a result display as the active window the corresponding channel is also acti
40. lt Time gt 0 s to measurement time RST 0s Example ADEM PM RPO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us Manual operation See Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only on page 52 9 7 Analyzing Results The following remote commands are required to configure general result analysis set tings concerning the trace markers lines etc in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 Analysis on page 71 e Working with Markers Remote 187 Benning Limit Checks iei on ne dec ac n deb ce ael ed 217 e Zooming into the BISplay iced eiecit ede iid settee s EL La E eee FADA Ra 230 9 7 1 Working with Markers Remotely In the Analog Demodulation application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 4 3 4 Marker Function Configuration on page 89 9 7 1 1 Analyzing Results Setting Up Individual Mates ceperat ehe eee nee nee er e RR er Rn 188 General Marker Settings c d e Ur UR UE EISE RE 194 e Marker Search Gpechoorams nennen 195 Maiko Search Selle uci itera ere Fo e Re C D aa 203 e Positioning the MaEKGer 2 eret roe onana EERSTEN 204 e Configuring Special Marker Functions c ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeencneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define t
41. on page 17 See Marker Table on page 18 See Marker Peak List on page 19 Configuring the Result Display Table 9 2 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPec AM Spectrum trum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt To query the name and index of all windows in all measurement channels use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result 2 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of
42. softkey sss 85 Search settings Markers remole etri ete anaes 203 Select Frame le EE 48 77 Sel amp ct Market eei ente esi renta Dans 86 Settings Displayed EE 32 File name ses Restoring files 43 92 Storage location 2591 Settings files priore pee 32 ele Tue WEE EN Predefined E 243 CV M 32 Shift x Limitliies rtr eene detti tres 103 Shift y Limit lines irren ted eret tries 103 Shifting L imitlines ceteri Peri E eee 96 Signal source REMOS E M Signal to noise ratio Signal to noise and distortion Hl TT 18 SINAD Mem 18 Querying remote eene eint 185 Troubleshooting SINGIE ZOOM EE Slope TMQ GED nett ETE Softkeys Clear Spectrogr lm i e entire 49 77 Color MAPPING suguer e eerte tns 77 Frame count siis History Depth rettet trn 7T Search Conflgi 2 reor ena tenore rere rn 85 SelectEFame 29 iterato de tet os tuat iia 48 77 Sort mode x rj 92 Spalt es ven OD Displayed aa 10 Manual ET EEH 55 Specifics for el le lee EE 34 Spectrograms Activating Deactivating risiini dienos TT Clearing aerasi is 49 77 COIG CUNG oasis rannen dE geed nde 28 79 Color MAPPING WT 27 77 T8 Color mapping remote control s 168 Color scheme n nsnessoneneennesnererenee 2f T9 Configuring remote contro
43. 2 1 Starting the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 7 2 2 Understanding the Display Information esee nnn 8 3 Measurements and Result Displays eese 11 4 Measurement Basis nece trenta noon naaien annainn 20 4 1 Demodulation PrOCoess niin nernnua tinus u un nnn nasa ANANE GONNE YENA RANA RRERRR RR RR RRRRRR RR 20 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidtn cccccesceescccesseeseeeeeseeeeeeneseeeeseseseeeeseeseseeeeseeeesenseeeeseeanens 22 AS AF Filtets e aec cd eh anre nid a ca Foe D D v Fee eda idc 23 AA Time Domain ZoOOm 2iirnrrie iino k unns aiia uua PEERAA NAKEN NANREN 23 4 5 Working with Spectrograms eeeseeeeeeeeeneeeen nennen nnne nnne in nnne nnns 24 NE sp eet 30 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards eene 30 5 2 Configuration Overview ee oeeiteceer eere rennen rennen irren cene nego rennes 32 5 3 Input and Frontend Settings seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nnne nnn 34 5 4 Trigger Source ln eterne ti tr 42 5 5 Data ACQUISILIOR eene eret n nn er RE Pt KR e ER eRRRRRERRARRASRRR SERA REA SARNRKRRERNRAR HEREEERRKRRNRRKRRERRAA 46 5 0 JDemodulation Ere ERU IE 49 5 Qutput Settings eene ERS c lt esnactecdvasasceceuesesaees corseet2eedes 63 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically
44. 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 Manual operation See vw Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt and lt m gt are irrelevant Analyzing Results Parameters lt SearchArea gt viSible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELT
45. 79 Elei ee NEE 79 c M 7T Spectrograms 27 77 78 Ee C5 serio cocotte taire conem ra ies e re enar 28 Color scheme ne E E 27 T9 Comment LE Todi Un 101 Compatibility Limit lines E 94 99 Conditions Measurement nennt 20 Configuration Measurement remote cecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeaes 117 Proceduro EE 33 Conventions SCPlIcommiands 2 eccle Poetae crt ds 112 Coupling Input remote WEE 119 D Data acquisition Isemote control c et tei e ees 131 fure 46 Data format ile 245 Binary EI ue 181 183 DB per division SCAN E 59 DBW see Demodulation bandwidth sesssse 9 Decimal separator Trace OX POMS ecco ciem o ctaded ice e Dre ees te Eu br sey 75 Deemphasis filter XI ge 58 Sue 151 Deleting Limit line values entire Ree 103 Settings UE 32 Standards oe Rebel qus Nene nelle cessere desc Delta markers A DEMIN eet Demodulation E EE el ule LTE lee RF spectrum fe EE SONG EET SPOCUUM s oce ee Edit Spectrum Result Summary sss 54 DES Sege Demodulation bandwidth COMGIIONS sepe m E Deempliasis Tiller mitterent hr on ent erben Displayed Remote control net n eerie het Nee et DEE Detectors Isemote control oca aaa eessen Sege 163 Hc E 73 Dev per division fere 59 Deviation fel 61 Diagram footer information
46. 85 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 83 9 7 1 3 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Analyzing Results Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulatecn MARKer m MAXimum LEFT on page 204 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 204 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m MAXimum PEAK on page 204 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 205 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt gt gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 205 gt gt gt MINimum PEAK on page 205 gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimu D RIGHt on page 206 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAME ener nnne nnn 196 CALCu
47. Demod 1 AM Spectrum 1AP Clrw X Ref 100 0096 Gig AF CF 40 0 kHz 1001 pts AF Span 80 0 kHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe AM REL AFSPectruml see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 FM Spectrum Displays the frequency deviations of the demodulated FM signal in Hz or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT mE RE ECRPEE E NE NUUS User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 14 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays AF Span 80 0 kHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe FM AFSPectruml see on page 174 PM Spectrum Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe PM AFSPectruml see on page 174 RF Time Domain Displays the RF power of the input signal versus time The level values represent the magnitude of the UO data set User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 15 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays Analog Demod 3 RF Time Domain 1AP Clrw KR Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM see L on page 174 RF Spectrum Displays the spectrum of the input signal In contrast to the Spectrum application the frequency values are determined using FFT from the recorded UO data set User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 16 R amp S V
48. HCOhNtnuous nennen 160 DISPlay WINDow n TRAQGe t SELect eet NEE teet ade aane a cu oaa 160 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere ene nen nnne 160 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE esee 161 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain PE 161 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum PE 161 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE ttn 161 SENSS ADEMod ai gt FM AF SPectrum d E 161 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMAain TYPE ecce 161 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TvpEL eene 161 SENSe ABDEMod n SPEGCtrum TYPE 2 accade cuan rune e Frente brat 161 ISENSeTAVERagesm C ODE dicii deret etes eie petere tt citt t departed des 162 Configuring the Measurement Ei LE EK RE 163 SENSe JAVE Rage Sh TYPE aoa iet Eee exo ERE ERE ERa eR IKEx 2 Eae SUPR AREE FERE EETA 163 ISGENGe JiuiNDow nz IDETechorzGfFUNGCHon eene 163 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO isses 164 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default
49. JADEMedsn PRESStSTOR6e rti ied eee at d ehe du aso daz aa 119 SENSe JADEMod n PRESet STANdard Standard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu lation standards is C Nr sNinstrNuser predefined MAdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values lt Standard gt The query returns the name of the currently loaded standard Manual operation See Load Standard on page 31 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined Analog Demodulation standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards lt n gt is irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 32 9 4 3 9 4 3 1 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current Analog Demodualtion measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu altion standards is C Nx sNXinstrNuserNpredefinedNVAdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Standard gt String c
50. K7 Welcome to the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Analog Den Ref Level 04 r RBW 1 917 kHz 10d8 AQT 2ms DBW 16MHz Freq 10 GHz Analog Demod 1 FM Time Domain 3 1AP Cirw DC Ref 000Hz Gig Qo 1 Color coding for windows of same channel 2 Channel bar with measurement settings 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display Channel bar information In the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application the R amp S VSE shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Analog Demodulation application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset AQT Measurement time for data acquisition RBW Resolution bandwidth DBW Demodulation bandwidth Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 9 Understanding the Display Information os Analog Demod 2 1 FM Time Domain LAP Clrw DC Ref 0 00 Hz Se D 819 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Analog Demodulation application 0 Color coding for windows of same channel 1 Edit result display function 2 Channel name 3 Window number 4 Window type 5 Trace color trace numb
51. LEVel PM lt Level gt The command sets the level when PM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 1000 to 1000 RST 0 RAD Default unit RAD DEG Example TRIG LEV PM 1 2 RAD Sets the PM trigger threshold to 1 2 rad Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event for offline input from a file Configuring the Measurement Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR MAGN Sets an offline magnitude trigger source TRIG MAP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 46 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for the offline magnitude trigger source used for input from a file Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR MAP Sets the offline magnitude trigger source TRIG MAP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the tri
52. LIM3 Names li CALC LIM3 Selects CALC LIM3 CALC LIM3 Defines CALC LIM3 Defines CALC LIM3 Shifts t CALC LIM3 Defines CALC LIM3 Defines CALC LIM3 Defines are stil MMEM SEL C MMEM STOR MMEM STOR Analyzing Results 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1 UPP MODE ABS an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1 UNIT DBM the unit dBm for limit line 1 SUPP 210 725 0 25 10 5 definition points for limit line 1 UPP MARG 5dB an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations l tolerated UPP SHIF 10DB he limit line 1 by 10 dB UPP OFFS 3dB an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 1 NAME FM3 mit line 3 FM3 LOW MODE REL a relative vertical scale for limit line 3 UNIT DB CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3 LOW SHIF 2 he limit line 3 by 2dB LOW OFFS 3 an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3 LOW THR 200DBM a power threshold of 200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked LOW MARG 5dB an area of 5dB around limit line 3 where limit check violations l tolerated em Storing the limit lines HAN LIN ALL ON TYPE CHAN STAT l LimitLines FM1 FM3 Analyzing Results Example Performing
53. PORE EE 12 EM Time RT EE 12 PM Xe Domai etre ete eria pea aea hae EDU Fe nr batnr Yee etg ANNE 13 AIT SC DI EE 13 iubes M H 14 PM Spect m ME PEE 15 RF Time DOMA EO OEIL TT 15 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays RF SPUN M M m 16 Rosul SOMNI EE 17 Maker KT 18 Markor Peak EE 19 AM Time Domain Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in versus time Analog Demod 2 AM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 96 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM REL See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency spectrum of the demodulated FM signal versus time User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 12 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays Analog Demod 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw DC Ref 0 00Hz ig Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM FM See on page 174 PM Time Domain Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM PM See on page 174 AM Spectrum Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 13 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays Dog EEUU UU SSS SSS Analog
54. Pass on page 56 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 56 Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT HPAS FREQ MAN 3MHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 3 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 56 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filter refer to High Pass on page 56 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT HPAS ON Activates the selected high pass filter Manual operation See High Pass on page 56 SENSe FILTer n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute FilterType This command selects the absolute low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 57 Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Configuring the Measurement Example FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 57 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter
55. QFACtor essen 214 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESUIt sse 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe ss CALCulate lt sn gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME 215 CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz FEUNGCioncbhNOtseREGut enne 216 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe eese 216 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFEUNGCionRtterence AA 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimuUM LEF EE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt o CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MAimum PDEART A 204 CAL Culate nz MAh ker mzMiNimum LEET CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimuUMmINEX T acetate tuc eret reip ce aci e ge edo Ca YR n CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMIARIGH tees ciere oiii acne dasa dunn Cea SEV E SE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK ei e E ele E CALCulatesn MARKer m SGRam FRAMS ise coacta e etre e eta va ire o NSEAE deet CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SARea sess nnne ennnen ie nentn se nent nennen nin nnns rennen CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MlINimum PEAK esee 197 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe E CALC
56. RF signal power versus time Spectrum of the RF signal e Determining maximum minimum and average or current values in parallel over a selected number of measurements e Error free AM to FM conversion and vice versa without deviation errors frequency response or frequency drift at DC coupling This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S VSE User Manual 2 1 Starting the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation applica tion The R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application is a separate application on the R amp S VSE It is activated by creating a new measurement channel in Analog Demod mode To activate the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 1 Q Channel Select the Add Channel function in the Sequence tool window A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available in your R amp S VSE Understanding the Display Information The R amp S VSE opens a new measurement channel for the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during an Analog Demodulation measurement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S VSE
57. SPEC BAND 61 2kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 61 2 kHz SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SRATe This command returns the sample rate set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM SRAT Returns the current sample rate Usage Query only SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod Bandwidth This command sets the bandwidth for analog demodulation Depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth the software selects the required sample rate This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM Parameters Bandwidth RST 5MHz Example BAND DEM 1MHz Sets demodulation bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Demodulation Bandwidth on page 47 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE FilterType This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM TYPE Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussian filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT SENSe BANDwidth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band width from the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth Parameters lt Bandwidth gt refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Example BAND 1 MHz
58. Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Resolution Bandwidth on page 47 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a capture count of 0 or 1 the R amp S VSE performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the capture count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring the Measurement SENSe SWEep POINts lt MeasPoints gt This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Parameters lt MeasPoints gt Range 51 to 524288 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Points on page 48 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 5 4 Trigge
59. Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue colors indicate high ones RADar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray RST HOT Example DISP WIND SPEC COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 79 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in the R amp S VSE User Manual e Global Layout Comimands etie tide eL bea SRL uda ER FL RA HEU 170 e Working with Windows in the Display 173 e General Window Tu Le oc ed erret a edle ti ilb dde tee duas 178 9 5 1 d Configuring the Result Display Global Layout Commands The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the Screen layout across measurement channels as you do in manual operation For compatibility with other Rohde amp Schwarz Signal and Spectrum Analyzers the lay out commands described in chapter 9 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 173 are also supported Note however that the commands described there only allow you to configure the layout with
60. a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes Center frequency e Reference level Configuring the Measurement e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 68 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters lt Duration gt Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 69 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE lt Mode gt In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S VSE determines the length of the measurement Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The R amp S VSE determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S VSE uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DUR
61. aB 20 log Es i l In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided Carrier Power the power of the carrier without modulation Carrier Offset the deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal carrier frequency Modulation Depth AM or RF Time Domain only the difference in amplitude the carrier signal is modulated with Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt on page 184 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 83 R amp S VSE K7 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Marker Table Wnd X Value Y Value 0 256 0 00 dB 415 512 1 94 dB 489 512 1 95 dB 266 512 2 00 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application
62. and the noise power at the position of the specified normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 91 Analyzing Results 9 7 2 Defining Limit Checks 9 7 2 1 Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x val ues for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This con trol line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines Confgunmg Limit UNES EE 217 e Managing mic DE 225 e Checking the Results of a Limit Check ciens cet i 226 e Programming Example Using Limit Lines eene 227 Configuring Limit Lines GALOulatesn LIMItek COMMA TIL irr einen denen eren menie RR ERR RR ES 217 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTTol DATA eese nennen nnne 218 CALCulatesmbpMitsk X ONTIOEDOMalh vna eda cav aset tet pen deett tenus 218 CAL Gulate ns EIMitek CONTIOEMODBE 2 1 rri nno sede eda A esos A sensed 218 CAL Culate nz LUlMitzks COhNTrotOktzet eser annees sa ses nensis n 218 CAL Gulate n LIMitek CONTEOESHIPI iiie 00000043002 orci ihi ne rr rana Do sah dicm ENEE EENS ec 219 CALCuUlate n LIMit k CONTroESPAQCing 2 criteria ere iii
63. attenuation for RF input Configuring the Measurement If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 40 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S VSE determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 40 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 128 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level
64. be supported by this particular application 9 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S VSE follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 112 9 1 2 9 1 4 Introduction Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation I
65. by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 231 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 230 Multiple Zoom D Zoom Functions In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn 200M MULTiple zoom STATe on page 232 DISPlay WINDowcn 200M MULTiple zoom AREA on page 231 Restore Original Display Q 1 1 Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 231 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 232 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 231 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 232 for each multiple zoom window 7 How to Perform Measurements in the Ana
66. dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative lt Level gt The command sets the level when AM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 100 RST 0 Default unit Example TRIG LEV AM REL 20 Sets the AM trigger threshold to 20 Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute Level The command sets the level when RF power signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters Level Range 100 to 30 RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example TRIG LEV AM 30 dBm Sets the RF power signal trigger threshold to 30 dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM Level The command sets the level when FM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters Level Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV FM 10 kHz Sets the FM trigger threshold to 10 kHz Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence
67. ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 126 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 127 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the instrument in use you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Note that restrictions may apply concerning which frequencies electronic attenu ation is available for depending on which instrument is connected to the R amp S VSE software Check your instrument documentation for details In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provid
68. for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 57 Parameters Frequency numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ MAN 150kHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 150 kHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 57 SENSe FILTer n L PASs FREQuency RELative FilterType This command selects the relative low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 57 Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example FILT LPAS FREQ REL 25PCT Selects the low pass filter as 25 of the demodulation band width Manual operation See Low Pass on page 57 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 57 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT LPAS ON Activates the selected low pass filter Manual operation See Low Pass on page 57 Configuring the Measurement 9 4 9 5 Defining the Scaling and Units The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed 9 4 9 6 Scaling for AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTin
69. input you can shift the center frequency of the current measurement compared to the stored measurement data The maximum shift depends on the chan nel s current analysis bandwidth ep ABW me ABW file 2 channel CFshift max If the file does not provide the center frequency it is assumed to be 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 123 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SPAN min S f span S f max and fmax DBW 2 fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 149 SENSe ADEMod n SPEC SPAN ZOOM on page 149 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determines the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 22 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 RF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 149 AF Filter The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function It is config
70. is retrieved using the TRAC DATA Or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Optionally the header can be excluded from the file see Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 75 The data of the file header consist of three columns ea
71. it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Analyzing Results Manual operation See Marker Table on page 18 See Marker Peak List on page 19 See I Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 See Marker Position X value on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode If the analog demodulator option Analog Demodulation R amp S VSE K7 is activated the query result is output in the following units in the specified window Result display Output unit AM FM Hz PM rad deg defined with UNIT lt n gt ANGLe on page 155 RF dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear dB Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outpu
72. level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the instrument in use is adapted according to this value it is rec ommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 125 Input and Frontend Settings Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S VSE so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S VSE must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level off
73. lines are available and can be used for the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see chapter 6 5 2 2 Limit Line Details on page 100 NIME ERE E ST DRE 99 I D EE EE 99 deeds m 99 Eo M 99 Ree 9 E E PNE E m 99 eg MITIS D E 99 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 99 L Show lines for all modes rettet ntu ntn ritas 99 POS EE 100 RCM TI Mn eee 100 Greate e EEN 100 sio L3 NT TETUER TTE 100 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application eB c E 100 TA E EE 100 e CONAMUR E ERR 100 Name The name of the stored limit line Unit The unit in which the y values of the data points of the limit line are defined Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings Visibility Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the same time Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe on page 224 CALCulate n LIMit k ACTive on page 225 Traces to be Checked Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines As Soon as a trace to be checked is defined th
74. measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 87 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 87 9 7 1 6 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Configuring Special Marker Function
75. n gt SPECtrogram TRACe CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram S TATe irn tt araa TEENE Eda PA Snar iN eraa FEAT Eaei 167 ie erus RE EE 125 DIAGnostic SERVICE Eeler 121 DISPlay MTABle DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect DISPlay WINDowsn SGRam COLor DEFault ct ie trt teens 168 DISPlay WINBowsn SGRam COLor EQOWEAF trece thee tree rte eic eee aE ebrio cue euius 168 DISPlay WINDowsn SGRam COLorSEIADBe inca tiene terat eerte toten mieten ath abend es 168 DISPlay WINDowsn 5GRam GOLor UPPSer cctti iot tet race treten ntes rece neces dens 169 BISPlayE WINDowsn SGRam iCObLor ST Ye rotes cones tio tea riora intere eene Sx r gie naa DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault E DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer essent eene rennen DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe eese nennen nennen DISPlay WINDowsrn 7 SPECtrogram GOLor UPP r certet tne trn trier nene DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe esses DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue essere nennen nenne e neret rennen DISPlayEWINDowsri7 TRACest le RT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous BISPlay WINDowsrnz TRACES Een ggEesde ege uua E TENE EE ENA E TE OENE ENDE A DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACING ariran n tn tnr rre eet RUE SEVEN Ou RRE EN d Re RE DISPla
76. number of horizontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S VSE either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 RST Limit line state is OFF Analyzing Results Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt lt Distance gt
77. nz D I Tamarker cmz MREF AA CAL Culate nz D I Tamarkercmz GGhRamERAMe A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MlINimumr PEAK esee CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe essen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow as CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz GGbamvMAXimum NENT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese enne CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum ABOWe sess enne CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELOw esee CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT e CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK sese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe esses ennemi CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea essent CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK sese CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABONWe essent CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sess CALCulate lt n gt DELT
78. on page 32 Restore Standard Files Setup Standard Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PRESet RESTore on page 118 5 2 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement configuration an overview of the most important cur rently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon in the main toolbar or the Meas Setup gt Overview menu item Configuration Overview Input RF Ref Level 0 0 d m Level Offset 0 0 dB Att 10 0 dB DBW 5 0 MHz Preamp Off AQT 62 5 us Video Out IF Center Freq 13 25 GHz Demod Filter Flat Trigger Out Off Lei ap Input Frontend Data Acquisition Output Se m Trigger l Demod Settings J Analysis Source Free Run Squelch State off Trace 1 Clear Write Level Squelch Level 20 0 dBm Detector Auto Peak AF Center 1 25 MHz Marker 1 Off AF Span 2 5 MHz Limits Off Preset Channel Setup Standard Specifics for 1 FM Time Domain i In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire Analog Demodulation measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog box
79. positions it on the peak power Subsequently you can change the coordinates of the fixed reference independent of the marker The fixed reference is independent of the trace and is applied to all active delta markers Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Analyzing Results Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 203 MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 213 chapter 9 7 1 4 Marker Search Settings on page 203 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 210 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHontbtake COUNG eren nnnns 210 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eee 211 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz FUNCHontbtaks Stat 211 CAL Culate nz M Ab kercmzFUNCHiontbtake SOT 211 CAL Culate nz M Ab kermzFUNCHiontbtakeziAaTe eene 212 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks X eeesssessssessssssee seen nannten nnne 212 CALC latesn MARKer lt m gt FU
80. set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S VSE User Manual A programming example at the end of the remote commands description demonstrates the most important commands in a typical application scenario see chapter 9 8 Pro gramming Example on page 232 Status registers The R amp S VSE K7 option uses the status registers of the base unit except for the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register For a description see the R amp S VSE User Manual General R amp S VSE Remote Commands The application independent remote commands for general tasks on the R amp S VSE are also available for Analog Demodulation measurements and are described in the R amp S VSE User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality Controlling instruments and capturing data e Managing Settings and Results e Setting Up the Instrument Using the Status Register Channel specific commands Apart from a few general commands on the R amp S VSE most commands refer to the currently active channel Thus always remember to activate an Analog Demodulation channel before starting a remote program for an Analog Demodulation measurement v ntrodiJGHODy etre oec etate N 112 Common SUMRGS feces Netcast aa essed A UR d RAS FENNE EENEN eet 116 e Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements sse 117 e Configuring the Measurement iirinn eters EIE EORR E ERR 117 e Configuring the Result Display
81. setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 72 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters State ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF
82. specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker Demodulation This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see chapter 4 5 1 Time Frames on page 26 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 166 Continue Frame Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes Max Hold Min Hold and Average This function is available in single sweep mode only On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account e Off The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept frames only Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CONT on page 165 Frame Count Determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep measurement as opposed to a continuous sweep The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history depth see History Depth on page 77 For more details see chapter 4 5 1 Time Frames on page 26 Remote command CALCulate
83. tgp ec a ded pex ede iar 225 CAL Culatesns LIMitFS Kk DELEI srr nire ber tree tnn reae caet recevra et acte e Yeu red eee 225 CAL Culatesm gt iI Mitsk gt RAE so 227 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin D GAL GCulatesn bIMitsks EOWet MODE iere ir eere et ero oe eet trace ct AG esas CALCulatecnzLlMitckz LOwWerOEtGei einen entren rennes h nnns sistens stent s rnnt sre CALCulatesn LIMitsks EOWesE SEPIEL E CALG latesn gt en LOWE SPACING DEE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe i CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer Mee e e DE 221 CAL Culatesn bIMitsks EOWetr DATA ca ooi rtr reca eu ere to t ee e Errem tri ETATE GENEA 219 CAL Culatesm gt uds pu cm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk CAL Gulatesn LIMItSKS UNIT uino rh etta a Feud teta date pap Hz eee thease CAL GCulate sns LIMitsks PPer MARGIFI aieo ta cer ea eere Dr Eruca come di er b E Dread CAL Culate cnzLlMitckz UbberMODE A CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFF Set E CAL Culatesns LIMitsks PPer SEL ici coe eoo coc coa esee rite et eth reo anu tee e etna CALCulatesn LIMitsks UPPer SPACING a orato torta etra epe nut ENEE E ehe nte beo pev ERES exe tene eR Ig paa CALCulatesn LIMitsks UPPer STATO aene bre tepore erac nan copas bre te pdt dpa gea e Ce ee e Bep eeu CAL Culate n bI
84. that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECk on page 226 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spec trum analyzers which are still supported however CALC LIM TRAC see the description of commands for compatibility in the R amp S VSE User Manual CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe on page 226 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Manual operation See Traces to be Checked on page 99 Checking the Results of a Limit Check CAL Culate nzLlMitcks CLEartiMMedatel eene 227 i e DEI EI Mite PAN m 227 9 7 2 4 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CLEar IMMediate This command deletes the result of the current limit check The command works on all limit lines in a measurement windows at the same time lt n
85. the Vertical Axis Amplitude Gcalmg 125 Conliquring Data ee Ire EE 131 e Reie D 135 e Configuring Demodulation ntt entero te re RR Rennen n EESEENN 143 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese 155 Conliquring Standard WR 158 ein le iere ge ele EE 164 9 4 1 Restoring the Default Configuration Preset SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute eeeieieeeeeesece inaaianei nth nn nan bnt annt 117 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default software settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel 9 4 2 Configuring the Measurement Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 34 Managing Standard Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 30 For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 3 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 243 SENSe ADEMod n PRESet S TANdard ceteri 118 SENSeTADEModens PRESSERES TOTG 5 oti d etant eate e eoe td eti cadet igi 118 SENSe
86. the current color distribution 2 Preview pane shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme 3 Color curve pane graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4 5 Color range start and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 168 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 169 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Shape cd the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to lt 0 More colors are distributed among the lower values Oo Colors are distributed linearly among the values 20 to 1 More colors are distributed among the higher values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe on page 168 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe on page 169 Auto Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for optimized display Set to Default Set
87. the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 65 9 4 9 Configuring Demodulation The following remote commands are required to configure the demodulation parame ters in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chap ter 5 6 Demodulation on page 49 e Basic Demodulation Seltifigs rure reet ett tle e b eet 144 e Time Domain Zoom RT e EN 145 e Configuring the Demodulation Gpectum essen 147 e Post processing AF Eilters einn t nnn nnne 149 9 4 9 1 Configuring the Measurement Defining the Scaling and Unis ceo rnt eve eni te el eee aa 154 Scaling for AF Evaliation cete REX ER RENE ENEE Ee ee 154 e Scaling for RF EE ccrte e netten eere aera Pe paa oL pee coL ARE EE euet 154 LES pcc PEE 154 Basic Demodulation Settings The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed Useful commands described elsewhere chapter 9 4 9 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings on page 145 Basic demodulation commands SENSe JADEModsn AF COU PING DEE 144 SENSe JADEMod n SQUelch STATe eee tentent 144 SEENEN ees 145 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling Coupling This command selects the coupling of the AF path of the analyzer in the specified win dow Parameters Coupling AC DC RST AC PM DC FM Example A
88. toolbars can be hidden or displayed Hiding and displaying a toolbar 1 Right click any toolbar or the menu bar A context menu with a list of all available toolbars is displayed 2 Select the toolbar you want to hide or display A checkmark indicates that the toolbar is currently displayed The toolbar is toggled on or off Note that some icons are only available for specific applications Those functions are described in the individual application s User Manual General toolbars The following functions are generally available for all applications Main toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 6 Functions in the Main toolbar Icon Description E zl Overview Displays the configuration overview for the current measurement channel Save Saves the current software configuration to a file Recall Recalls a saved software configuration from a file Save UO recording Stores the recorded UO data to a file Recall UO recording Loads recorded UO data from a file Print immediately prints the current display screenshot as configured Aa b RR NK ij Add Window Inserts a new result display window for the selected measurement channel Control toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Reference of Toolbar Functions Table 1 7 Functions in the Control toolb
89. vo Batts 6 11 Deta2 on m on E Peak j List 12 16 Detas oe non Lines joa Off Norm Bie All Phase Noise Markers Off Specifics for 6 FM Spectrum S For more information see chapter 6 4 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 89 Phase Noise Measurement Gtate enne 91 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Om 92 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement at the marker position in the dia gram In the Analog Demodulation application this function is only available for normal mark ers If activated the normal markers display the phase noise measured at their current position in the marker table For details see chapter 6 4 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 89 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 216 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 216 Marker Peak List Configuration In the Analog Demodulation application the search limits are not available To display the Marker Peak List dialog do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Peak List tab State O
90. within the value range i e where the focus of the vis ualization lies shape of the color curve The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R amp S VSE The Color Scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values Four different color ranges or schemes are available e Hot Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low levels red colors indi cate high ones Cold Working with Spectrograms Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low levels blue colors indicate high ones The Cold color scheme is the inverse Hot color scheme e Radar EE gp 23 080 Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between Dark colors indicate low levels light colors indicate high ones e Grayscale 10dBm Shows the results in shades of gray Dark gray indicates low levels light gray indi cates high ones The Value Range of the Color Map If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram you can optimize the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are close together and only parts of interest are displayed at all The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever if a certain ar
91. you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 140 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 136 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff on page 139 5 5 Data Acquisition How data is to be acquired and then demodulated is configured in the Data Acquisi tion dialog box e Bandwidth Gettings AAA 46 e Capture Settings ener ec ende eda vea aee eet o ent bec ain e ud 47 5 5 1 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth settings define which parts of the input signal are acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the Bandwidth tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box Demodulation Bandwidth 5 0 MHz Meas Time AQT 62 5 us Resolution Bandwidth 61 22199 kHz gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the Meas Setup gt Bandwidth menu item D m dulation Ba e EE 47 Measutemeht Time AGIT icd siete lacet ed a nece tero eee nega 47 Resolution Baridwidlli 2 intet ttee deco temer EE ege 47 5 5 2 Data Acquisition Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determ
92. 0 Uc HET eE tee peter reer ere ce eee recerepes ter pret cee rere crreccerererrreteererrr errr ererrr err epr tere 51 AF COUNTS E 51 wi i ze Nr 51 Time Domain Zem roro eter a eee dence o bue ke Re cx cde 51 E eebe 51 ND AMONT em 52 Beana e a 52 Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain onhy 52 Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain on 52 Squelch State Activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demodulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch STATe on page 144 Demodulation Squelch Level Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch LEVel on page 145 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero
93. 02 230 R amp S VSE K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements JEE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 106 See Restore Original Display on page 107 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 107 9 7 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 231 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe ensenen ersrersrsrsrnrrr nenne nene 232 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 106 um EP EI gt Se ae User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 231 Progr
94. 12 0 17 4 een Measured values x value lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Name of next window Data section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod SENSe WINDowsn 7 DE Tector t EFUNCtlon erret there 163 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCH AUTO iinr 164 SENSe ADEModsri AF CENTOr rotor etti e reri thee tenax o SEE EIS P EM COE BER SNR SEXES Ere PER EIER IER 147 SENSe ADEModsn AF COUPPIlifig rait ttr reete Er nne ta Ee toa ete t enean i 144 SENSe JADEModsri AF SPAN E 147 SENSe ADEModsri AF SPAN FULL icona reet hp e nanc er the rh etate ko Ere rir REES gen 147 SENSE ER ele EE 148 SENSe JADEModsri ARS eege eebe Ee 148 SENSe JADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum RESUIt sse 179 SENSe JADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE essent nnns 161 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESUIt essere 179 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain PE 161 SENSe ADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt esent 179 SENS
95. 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MiNmum PEART 199 e erreurs enis 189 GALGulatesn s TE uec cer rrt rne ner p a ERE C decr eere veh ann 189 GALGulatesn MARKersm X SS Ze rtr rrt ih ER ear XR EE ER XR OI SEE REN Y EX Eod as 194 ee EE TT E 190 GALGulate sn MARKer mb STAT6 uote kr rr rentrer rrt te i tenen p xen eon 189 GALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate 5 2 nort tota tern enr ttu cre neenon 165 CALC latesn SGRaM CONT ssanie 165 CALGu latesn SGRam FRAME COUN nainii iaai 165 GALGulate n SGRamtiFRAMG SEL6CL irt rr ert re NEN ra EEES ka Eo Rose ENaC piain 166 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam HDEPth GALGulate sn SGRam SIZE errem rne dere en reet cn ed tes i e re TRE n CALCulate lt n gt SGRam TRAGS ita tirer ere trien eee d hr a E For b Pe OR EY Y ERR Gn CALCulate lt n gt SGRam STATe CGALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMewdiate 1 inneren rrr 165 GALGulate n SPECtrogram GONT 3 tito irr tenet herr er EENS cassvnscersabenesertvacvsedaaupesetias cae 165 CALCulat n gt SPECtrogram FRAME ee El EE 165 GALGulate n SPECtrogram F RAMG SELecCL re etat rt rene etn rene na rn en 166 GALCulate n SPECtrogram HDENPHtL iieri rer mnn rn trt e iE ER ERR RR Y EE Sero EE 166 GAL Gulatesh SPEGtrogrami SIZ Bs i E CALCulate lt
96. 6 on page 81 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality See also Fixed Reference Marker Settings on page 208 Ee E e KEE 194 GALCulate spmMARKersm LINK 222 xn nri tata paa ea Ey rera nece eo aat eaaet as q Dc pe ann RR rina 195 DIS Play HMA m 195 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the mouse wheel It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel Analyzing Results Manual operation See Marker Stepsize on page 84 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK DisplayType Links the specified marker in all displays of the specified type Parameters lt DisplayType gt TIME SPECtrum BOTH NONE TIME Links the markers in all time domain diagrams SPECtrum Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays BOTH Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the AF Spectrum displays NONE Markers are not linked RST NONE Manual operation See Link Time Marker on page 84 See Link AF Spectrum Marker on page
97. 9 Help 241 Main 240 Marker 242 io PP 239 ZOOM RE 241 Total harmonic distortion SOG T EIU e era a urinis 18 Traces le nee Averaging remote control Configuration Configuring remote control 158 Detector isnin iisas n dad Detector remote control 163 Export format nier emnes 75 EXPONO ET 74 75 Kell o a ph De 73 Mode Mode remote eei deter 159 Remote conttol retreat 179 Retrieving results remote sssssssse 179 Settings remote control A 158 Settings predefined et 74 Traces to be Checked L imitlines neret etr ertt ene 99 Trigger Dropsout time etr nter 45 External remote 140 Holdoff we 46 Hysteresis Offset ee 45 OUTPUT e 64 Remote Control itt anis tr rte gestans 135 Slope 46 140 Trigger leVel EE 45 External trigger remote A 137 UO Power remote A 137 IF Power remote roesini a e 137 RF Power remote 3 eee eee ats 138 Trigger SOURCE ice uite entente ente 43 External 44 Free Run 244 UO Power Magnitude RF Power 1 44 furo e M 42 HI 44 Troubleslootirig irssi iaidd 110 Demodulation bandwidth ssesssssse 110 RE Speclrum rere nter eee iiaia 110 UNA RE 110 nip 110 U lcs 62 Reference lev
98. 9 02 02 25 R amp SSVSE K7 Measurement Basics n ME IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum e 1Pk Clrw CF 64 0 MHz 2 Span 2 5 MHz spectrogrr 3 1Pk Clrw X 6 e E 7 CF 64 0 MHZ 129 pts el Frame 50 Fig 4 4 Display elements for a result display with a spectrogram subwindow 1 Main result display in this case Spectrum 2 Marker info with frame number 3 Spectrogram subwindow title with trace information 4 Color map 5 Spectrogram subwindow 6 Current frame indicators 7 Deltamarker in Spectrogram and Spectrum displays 8 Current frame number For more information about spectrogram configuration see chapter 6 3 Spectrogram Settings on page 76 Remote commands Activating and configuring spectrograms chapter 9 4 12 Configuring Spectrograms on page 164 Storing results MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram on page 182 e Tire Eu EE 26 US oM lop PA 27 4 5 1 Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically along the y axis Each line or trace of the y axis represents one or more captured sweep and is called a time frame or simply frame As with standard spectrum traces several measured values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 26 Working with Spectrograms Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 Wit
99. ALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S VSE looks for dur ing a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Analyzing Results Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe State This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m g
100. DEM AF COUP DC Switches on DC coupling Manual operation See AF Coupling on page 51 SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch STATe State This command activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch LEVel on page 145 the demodu lated data is automatically set to 0 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are squelched Manual operation See Squelch State on page 50 9 4 9 2 Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SQUelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch STATe on page 144 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Threshold gt numeric value The absolute threshold level Range 150 dBm to 30 dBm RST 40 dBm Example DEM SQU LEV 80 If the signal drops below 80 dBm the demodulated data is set to 0 Manual operation See Squelch Level on page 51 Time Domain Zoom Settings Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and displayed in more detail GENSe JADEModen ZOOMLENG 145 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGth MODE cette tentent tens 145 SENSe JADEMod n ZOOM STARt eccentric 146 IGENSe lADE
101. EN CENT er STEP LINK ciant cou ete E heo esee goat etep been ica EEN 124 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FAC TOL caer toe tere rtp tt ete tumet tecta tabe 124 SENSe SWEep COUN em 134 SENSE SVV ECP el 135 CALCulate sn DEETamatrkersmo AOFL ER 190 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK eese 208 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOintY essen 209 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet sss 209 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe sese 209 CALCulate lt n gt DEL lamarker smo LINI uaa tet brit ot pr eec arre ma cep tetra eic eee nee ed Eee 191 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz LINK TOMAbkercmz enne enitn EEA 191 CAL CGulate nz D I TamarkerczmzMANimumlEET esent CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA NimumRIGHt A 207 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses 206 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker mo MlNimutmt LEF T coercere tirer rete cir reap teer ge terea CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT sch CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MihNimum RIGHt eene CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cessent CAL Culate n DEETamarkersms MODE iniri to Ere eei eicere Ser kieres aped n er ERE CAL Culate
102. GRam Y MINimum NEXT ssseseseseseeeee eren 199 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT essen 199 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eese 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK eee 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Analyzing Results Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See vw Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that th
103. IG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 Magnitude offline Trigger Source For offline input from a file rather than an instrument Triggers on a specified signal level Remote command TRIG SOUR MAGN see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the software uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar Trigger Source Settings A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQ
104. IGger SEQuence SLOP Ci nrc err nere ine a ATATEN Pre E FER RR EFIE ER TRIGger SEQuence SOURce TRIGger SEQuerice IME RINT tV l i t rrr nr rr rre ren rere err rns 141 ES Pec HO 155 LINE ENER f 155 Index Symbols user H PRRM 135 A A weighted filter ccm 57 ACIDO coupling ree 22 35 40 51 60 67 Activating Analog Demodulation measurements remote 117 Dig E O 11 AF Auto Scale Col D 61 AF center Demodulation spectrum eere 53 AP GR ew a 10 AF COUPIO EE 51 60 67 AF filters Awelghted WEE 57 eel p 57 e EC gc 57 E luet CT 55 Deactivating 58 Deemphasis 58 High pass se D I LOW E 57 Weighting EE 57 AF full span Demodulation spectrum nere 54 AF span Demodulation spectrum nre nnnen 54 Displayed Remote CONUPON sssrinin srair priiis nioa 147 AF SPOCUUIM ciiisean 53 AF start Demodulation spectrum 2 nrrnennnes 53 AF stop Demodulation spectrum 2 eres 53 All Functions Off recte mee 94 AM Spectrum Evaluation Method 5 creer nre rc rns 13 AM Time Domain Evaluation method creer rrr cen ne 12 Amplitude Efe cates 62 Iu
105. IOR ert eere n n n nre nen enn i erp t irn rts GEN legt ee ee ein GETT OUTPUEMRIGGERS POMS OU dE OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMediate treten rnnt err p te nnns 143 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSE LENGIR osiris aarin r erori e ener tb e cr rere rere Eod 143 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute TRAC lt gt DATA cte three yg nente te EDU dte PY b sete 181 TRIGger SEQuence D TIMe iiir ttr tren he Ferrari bra ense c rre Rn i SEET 136 TRIGE SEQUENCE HOLBORN TIME ace caccia oe ne ey ara olet ee FERE npe teo Exe Porter cov i0e 136 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HOLBDofF netten treten ttr ttp rcr terno rre 136 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresls rtr ttr nre ren a nh ENERE 136 TRIGger SEQuerice HEEVebAM RELdallVe occnet terree tuta eene epa aeo portae peret ENEE eege 138 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute rnt rn entr rr trn rrt reete 139 TRIGger SEQuence LEWVel FM 1 rrt tnit rere err t erre e rte ir eoe ar Races TRiGgerl SEQuence HEV CLIP ee TRIGger SEQueNCE E EVel IOPOWeFr ott ttt tirer e Rr terere een tpe TRIGger SEQuence LEVel MAPower TRiIGgerl SEQuence HEV CPM M TRIGger SEQueNnCe E EVel REBPOWer rtt rrt rr tr e ne e nen en RE TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port 5 trente nter torti 137 RE ee E ene RT d e EE 139 TRIGger SEQuence MAPowWer H YS T resis rrr rne n rr rrr eren nene ens 140 TR
106. Mitsk PPer THReshold ii iniret teret coe aevo tone CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA E CALGCulatesn MARKer me AQOEFEF iiiter a rud edere cete decre tpe gd ge e oed CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RE Gu 184 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz EUNGCionADEMod AMIRE Gutts 184 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult w185 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t sse 185 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t seen 184 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t esee 184 CAL CGulate nz MAbker mz FUNGC onADEMod GINad RE Guer 185 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt 186 CAL Culate cnzMAh ker mc FUNGC onFbtake ANNotznon l Abel GTATel 210 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFEUNGCionFptake OUNEN 210 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST GLEN 211 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT s CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFUNGCiontptakeGfATe A CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate esee 211 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCiontbteake NH 212 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCiontbteake Vd 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuUuency essent CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown
107. Moden ZOOMISTATel ttt tette tette 146 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth Length The command allows you to define the length of the time domain zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window manually If the length is defined manually using this command the zoom mode is also set to manual Parameters Length RST sweep time Length of the zoom area in seconds Example ADEM ZOOM LENG 2s Zoom mode is set to manual and the zoom length to 2 seconds Manual operation See Length on page 52 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE Mode The command defines whether the length of the zoom area for the analog demodula ted measurement data is defined automatically or manually in the specified window Configuring the Measurement Parameters Mode AUTO MAN AUTO Default The number of sweep points is used as the zoom length MAN The zoom length is defined manually using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth RST AUTO Example ADEM ZOOM LENG MODE MAN Zoom function uses the length defined manually Manual operation See Length on page 52 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt Time The command selects the start time for the zoomed display of analog demodulated measurements in the specified window The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time which is set and can be queried with the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MT IMe command If the zoom fun
108. N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 157 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 69 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 126 E Auto Settings Configuration For some automatic settings additional parameters can be configured The Auto Set Config dialog box is available when you select the icon from the Auto Set toolbar Meas Time Mode Auto Manual Value 1 0 ms Hysteresis Upper Value 1 0 dB Lower Value 1 0 dB Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value Auto Settings Configuration To determine the optimal reference level automatically a level measurement is per formed on the instrument in use You can define whether the duration of this measure ment is determined automatically or manually To define the duration manually enter a value in
109. NCtion FPEeakS Y enne 212 Mz eae ciTc anarai sde iaaea aa Aa N iura iiaiai 213 MMEMone STORES EE 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search Analyzing Results The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion lt n gt m are irrelevant Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example C
110. ORM ASC Selects output format ADEM AM RES AVER Reads RF time domain average results ADEM AM RES MAXH Reads RF time domain max hold results ADEM AM RES MINH Reads RF time domain min hold results Usage Query only Retrieving Results FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S VSE to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S VSE The R amp S VSE automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Return values lt TraceData gt The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured The number of
111. R amp S VSE K7 Analog Demodulation Application User Manual AED AN 1176 8939 02 02 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the R amp S9VSE base software 1320 7500 02 version 1 10 and higher The following software options are described e R amp S VSE K7 1320 7539 02 This software makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledge ment on the software CD ROM Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9VSE is abbreviated as R amp S VSE R amp SSVSE K7 Contents Contents E c M 5 1 1 About this Manual oniuccei iieri oneri dinners ONEAN RR NANANA NENA SANE SVEA NENE 5 1 2 Typographical Conventions eese eene enne nnne nnn niens 6 2 Welcome to the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 7
112. S SS aaa User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 198 Analyzing Results Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 206 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 206 ELTamarker lt m cCALCulate lt n gt MAXimum PEAK on page 206 e CALCulate lt n gt gt ELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 207 gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINi
113. SE K7 Measurements and Result Displays Analog Demod 4 RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw o f 1001 pts Span 1 6 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM SPECTRUM see on page 174 Result Summary The result summary displays the results of the demodulation functions for all windows in a table ES Analog Demod 5 Result Summary Carrier Power 30 22 dBm Carrier Offset 15 27 Hz RMS Mod Freq SINAD 52 161 36 234 9 9991 kHz 34 596 dB 9 9991 kHz For each demodulation the following information is provided User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 17 Table 3 1 Result summary description Label Description Peak Positive peak maximum Peak Negative peak minimum Peak 2 Average of positive and negative peaks RMS Root Mean Square value Mod Freq Modulation frequency SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and harmonic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calculation SINAD aB 20 H a noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All harmonics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed Cu THD
114. SP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 61 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 62 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 62 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S VSE adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters Position RST 100 PCT AF spectrum display 50 PCT time display Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Value Position on page 60 See Ref Level Position on page 62 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all trac
115. TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 46 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details
116. UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 42 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain for RF spectrum result display RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain for all result displays except RF spectrum OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 42 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor Factor This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters Factor 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 42 Configuring the Measurement 9 4 6 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling 9 4 6 1 The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment JAmbplit de SOHINGS c dci Helene dene reni ond vc edu shennan ine 125 LE eroe omisisse 126 e Configuring a Preamplifier
117. UT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 121 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of variable trigger input output connectors on the instrument in use Which output settings are available depends on the type of instrument in use For details see the instrument s documentation Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the instrument in use No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output Settings Output The instrument in use sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 142 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 142 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the instrument in use triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the instrument in use is in Ready Armed for trigger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 of the instrument in use if available For details see the STATus OPERation register description in the R amp S VSE User Manual and the instrument s documentation User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger
118. Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Count on page 48 See Average Count on page 74 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Parameters State ON OFF Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe AVERage n TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters Mode VIDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 73 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RST APEak UO Analyzer RMS 9 4 12 9 4 12 1 9 4 12 2 9 4 12 1 Configuring the Measurement Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 73 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector
119. Weighting on page 57 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIT ON Activates the CCITT weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 57 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant This command selects the deemphasis for the specified evaluation For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 58 Parameters 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example FILT DEMP TCON 750us Selects the deemphasis for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 4 MHz with a time constant of 750 us Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 58 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected deemphasis for the specified evalua tion For details about deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 58 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT DEMP ON Activates the selected deemphasis Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 58 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute lt FilterType gt This command selects the high pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 56 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt FilterType gt 20 Hz 50 Hz 300 Hz RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Selects the high pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 8 MHz Manual operation See High
120. a Limit Check This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency Sweep measurement in a remote environment The limit lines configured in Example Configuring Limit Lines on page 227 are assumed to exist and be active Jeep Preparing the instrument RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency SENS SWE COUN 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OdBm Sets the reference level to 0 dBm TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold 9 2 2 Configuring the limit check MMEM LOAD TYPE REPL MMEM LOAD STAT 1 LimitLines FM1 FM3 Loads the limit lines stored in LimitLines FM1 FM3 CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 CALC LIM1 UPP STAT ON Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW STAT ON Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3 CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Result FM1 FM3 CALC LIM1 TRAC3 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against tra
121. a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Configuring the Result Display Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query To query the index of a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow command Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel To remove a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window B
122. aae ue ka REENEN 219 CALOulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA eese eh nnne enne 219 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks LOMerMAhcGim seen nnsn nnns nnn nnns airs ne sns 220 CAL CulatesmsLMtsedcoWerMODE 2 tat etur eter ur ce bentes 220 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks LO MerOktzet ene A T a ne nnns sacs 220 GALGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt rnanis noinen iranran inaa a aaa anaE na 220 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks LOWerGb AChng ener nnne 221 CAEGulate n EIMit ks LOWer STAT E 1 1 ricette aiias oper Toce pas alarroc iia rclei pecca PdDng is 221 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks LO MerTH eshold eene 221 CAL Culate nzLUMItkSNAME nnns nennt aisi ssa sisse sinis sa assa n sii 222 CAL GulatesmbIMIESKSU INIT edite ia vp ede ec ed casera eet acd dee rer saneceanweandeces ys 222 CAL Culate n LIMit k UPPer DATA coit recorte ire iai a 222 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks UbPberMAhcGin esee innnan iania snas 222 CAL CulatesmsLMIESKSUPPerMODSE oett EAR 223 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks UbPberOtt et esee senssa sss seh sias nsns irai 223 GALOGulate n LIMitek UPPoer SHIFLE iini intu cient a Ronan NEESS 223 CALOCulate n LIMit k UPPer SPACing escis ener 224 CAL CulatesmnLIMieksDUPPer STATS ated eret exactum inr nmn ce entiers 224 CALC late lt n gt LlMit lt k gt UPPer THR SHOld eene nnne nn rnnt nias 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for a limit line lt n gt is irrele
123. activate and deactivate a limit check on page 104 How to edit existing limit lines on page 104 How to copy an existing limit line on page 104 How to delete an existing limit line on page 105 How to configure a new limit line on page 105 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally on page 106 How to find compatible limit lines gt Inthe Line Config dialog box select the View filter option Show compatible All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the Limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current mea surement settings are displayed in the overview How to activate and deactivate a limit check A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated 1 To activate a limit check Select the Check Traces setting for a limit line in the overview and select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check One limit line can be assigned to several traces The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines The status of the limit check is indicated in the diagram 2 To deactivate a limit line deactivate all Traces to check for it To deactivate all limit lines at once select the Disable All Lines button The limit checks for the deactivated limit lines are stopped and the results are remo
124. age 44 See Magnitude offline on page 44 See Time on page 44 See RF Power on page 44 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters lt Interval gt 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Configuring the Measurement 9 4 8 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument in use OUTPUETRIGGErSpOn gt DIRCCHON EE 142 OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel 2 2 iori Focuses eco atte rp vaa ee eR ve Pec ERR VR SE 142 OUNTPuETRIGOersport OTY PE eege 142 OUTPut TRiGaer port PULSe1MMsdiate 5 4 torneo uo Pha tds du ten rrt ono lan et nne 143 OUTPut TRIGgersport PUL Se ENGth 22 2 2 2 222222 0 irae orta eae tee EeEERREN EE ENER 143 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 64 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signa
125. al operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 68 9 4 11 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 39 SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous State Activates automatic scaling of the y axis in all diagrams according to the current mea surement results Currently auto scaling is only available for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Manual operation See AF Auto Scale on page 61 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 130 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 129 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlay WINDow lt n gt k TRACGest gt MODE nennen enne esten ener nsns senes 159 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectMODE
126. al user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Starting the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 2 Welcome to the R amp S VSE Analog Demodu lation application The optional R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application converts the R amp S VSE into an analog demodulation analyzer for amplitude frequency or phase modulated sig nals It measures not only characteristics of the useful modulation but also factors such as residual FM or synchronous modulation The digital signal processing in the R amp S VSE is also ideally suited for demodulating AM FM or PM signals The R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application provides the necessary measurement functions This application is optional and requires an addi tional licence The R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application features e AM FM and PM demodulation with various result displays Modulation signal versus time Spectrum of the modulation signal FFT
127. ale R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Pulse applications only Auto scale al R amp S VSE 3GPP EDD Pulse applications only Auto all ALL w Configure auto settings A 3 Predefined Standards and Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments Provided standard files The instrument comes prepared with the following standard settings e AM Broadcast e FM Narrowband e FM Broadcast Frequency Settling None default settings Predefined settings The following parameters can be stored in a standard settings file Any parameters that are not included in the xml file are set to their default values when the standard is loa ded Measurement settings e DBW e AQT e Demod Filter e Sweep Points e Squelch State Level Units Phase THD e RF Span Window display settings Position Predefined Standards and Settings e State e Window number e Window type all evaluation methods supported by the Analog Demodulation appli cation see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 11 Scaling Ref Position Dev per Division Time Domain Zoom State Start Length AF specific settings e AF Center e AF Span e AF Filters lowpass Highpass Deemphasis Weighting e Scaling for Spectrum Ref Value Deviation e Scaling for Time Domain R
128. all so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 203 Displaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 210 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external appli cation Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 213 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 182 n dB Down Marker A special marker can be defined to determine a characteristic bandwidth or time span in a measured signal n dB down markers are configured in the N dB Down Config dialog box using the n dB down function To display the N dB Down Config dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the n dB down button Select N dB Down Config Select Marker Function n dB Down Config Marker n dB down Value EB et n dB down Marker Giate sr enr siii sts s
129. am Y MAXimum PEAK eceesssseeneee 202 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooramv MAximumt PEART 202 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GGbRam vMiNimum ADOVe rn nrrrnnnnne 202 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz GbEChrooram v MiNimum AbBOye renen 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELOW seen 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOwW esee 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlNimum NEXT sese 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT eese 202 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbRam vMiNimumtPEART se eneserererererersrsrsrnen 203 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooram v MiNimum PEAK nenene neeneneeneee 203 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM
130. amarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK i CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum ABOWe eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELoOw eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT essen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK GALGulate n DELTamarkersm TRAGe rnnt rennen ert tr eoa Rao res CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tarmarke rs nine d ERTE 192 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt X RELALIVE sv ccncccschscacestecsaietecieercoeseadeuecvecncessenssentaedsoaianesdeavseeseteeieneence s 193 GALGulate n DELTamarkerstm Y i e ier ttr treni three he ege haero E OX E Eo eR ais 193 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe GALGulate n LIMitSKz AG IV oett trente re nn ert rr eger n e en EENE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CLEar IMMediate CAL Culatesn LIMitsk COMM EE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain is GALCGulate n LIMit k CONTrTOI MODE 1n tton tenente th ta enn treo Ra E renes CALCulatesn LIMitsks CONTON ORF SE aaen unanenn anae EE AET ee ere opea GALGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CON Trol SHE ttr rere nh rere ener CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA 218 CAL GCulatesn bIMItSKS CODY crier torpet eee epe entere recedere He ter to
131. amarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event R amp S VSE K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements PE CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the who
132. amming Example DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 106 See Restore Original Display on page 107 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 107 9 8 Programming Example In this example we will configure and perform an analog demodulation measurement to demonstrate the remote control commands Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMW Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz ecce Preparing the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 500 MHz Set the center frequency to 500 MHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm INST CRE NEW ADEM FMDemodulation Activate an Analog Demodulation measurement channel named FMDemodulation Programming Example ADEM MTIM ims Set the measurement time to 1 ms 10 periods SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement continuously BAND DEM 400 kHz Set the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz TRIG SOUR FM Use offline FM trigger TRIG LEV FM 500MHz Trigg
133. ar Icon Description Selects the currently active channel Capture performs the selected measurement Pause temporarily stops the current measurement e Continuous toggles to continuous sweep mode for next capture Single toggles to single sweep mode for next capture gt e Record performs the selected measurement and records the captured data and results Refresh Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data VSA application only Help toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 8 Functions in the Help toolbar Icon Description R Help Select allows you to select an object for which context specific help is displayed not available in standard Windows dialog boxes or measurement result windows Help displays context sensitive help topic for currently selected element Application specific toolbars The following toolbars are application specific not all functions shown here may be available in each application Zoom toolbar For a description of these functions see the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Table 1 9 Functions in the Zoom toolbar Icon Description Normal mouse mode the cursor can be used to select and move markers in a zoomed display Zoom mode displays a dotted rectangle in the dia
134. arameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC SGR CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement Manual operation See Continue Frame on page 49 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam FRAMe COUNt lt Frames gt CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt lt Frames gt This command defines the number of frames to be recorded in a single capture lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement Parameters Frames The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single capture mode CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Sets the number of frames to 200 Manual operation See Frame Count on page 49 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam FRAMe SELect Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis lt n gt is irrelevant The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends o
135. ation on page 156 RST AUTO Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 69 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 70 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 70 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in the current frequency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manu
136. be ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST POSitive lt OffsetSamples gt Number of samples to be used as an offset to the trigger signal The value indicated here is ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST 0 lt NoOfMeas gt Number of repetitions of the measurement to be executed The value indicated here is especially necessary for the average maxhold minhold function Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 Performs a measurement at sample rate 8 MHz record length 32000 trigger source EXTernal trigger slope POSitive offset samples 500 500 samples before trigger occurred of meas 30 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition From the specified RBW and the demodulation span set by SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 149 or SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 the required measurement time is calculated If the available measurement time is not sufficient for the given bandwidth the measurement time is Set to its maximum and the resolution bandwidth is increased to the resulting band width This command is identical to SENS BAND RES see the R amp S VSE User Manual lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST 61 2 kHz Example ADEM
137. bsolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Analyzing Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 94 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe essen 216 CAL Culate nz M AbkermmzFUNGCHonbhN OiseREGult 216 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe State This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off in the Analog Demodulation application Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement for the marker 2 Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 91 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement in the Analog Demod ulation application If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values lt PhaseNoise gt numeric value The difference between the measured carrier power
138. c unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz 9 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state log
139. caling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes cor rectly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 163 Trace Data Export Configuration Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous sweep mode if capture count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For capture count 71 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are performed Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 162 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold ERR Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings or exporting the UO data in other fo
140. ce 3 Trace 4 Trace Bifracep 72 maco Modo cest etre ti rne ert t b EA e a cate Ru aa da eR RR eis 72 Rien ess 73 FHOIG DEET 73 PNETAGS reo MEM 73 Average COUN EE 74 Predefined Trace Settings Quick CGonfig A 74 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Capture Count determines the number of averaging procedures Trace Settings View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 159 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Auto Se
141. ce3 maxhold trace CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace2 average trace CALC LIM CLE R amp S VSE K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 9 7 3 9 7 3 1 Clears the previous limit check results INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished CALC LIM1 FAIL Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the lower limit line check Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayEWINDow lt n ZOONGAREA og ertet reet e e Rc tet etu rueda 230 RIEGERT ER ee EE EEN DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e Span 25 0 MHz CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 106 SS rrr User Manual 1176 8939 02
142. ch separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 245 Reference ASCII File Export Format several columns depending on the measurement which are also separated by a sem icolon The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal sep arator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 75 Table 1 13 ASCII file format for trace export in the Spectrum application File contents Description Header data Type R amp S VSE Instrument model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span gt 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics mea sure
143. configuration 2 Define a Name and optionally a Comment for the new limit line 3 Define the x axis configuration e Time domain or frequency domain e Absolute or relative limits e Linear or logarithmic scaling 4 Define the y axis configuration e Level unit e Absolute or relative limits e Upper or lower limit line 5 Define the data points minimum 2 maximum 200 a Select Insert Value b Define the x value Position and y value Value of the first data point c Select Insert Value again and define the second data point d Repeat this to insert all other data points To insert a data point before an existing one select the data point and then Insert Value To insert a new data point at the end of the list move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select Insert Value To delete a data point select the entry and then Delete Value 6 Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box If neces sary correct individual data points or add or delete some If necessary shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting the Shift x or Shift y button and defining the shift width 7 Optionally define a Margin at a fixed distance to the limit line The margin must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the dia gram or preview area 8 Optionally if the y axis uses relative scaling define an absolute Threshold as an additio
144. ction is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with this command Parameters lt Time gt Range 0 s to measurement time zoom length RST 0s Example ADEM ZOOM STAT ON Switches on the zoom function ADEM ZOOM STAR 500us Sets the starting point of the display to 500 us Manual operation See Start on page 52 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe State The command enables or disables the time domain zoom function for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 146 If the zoom function is disabled data reduction is used to adapt the measruement points to the number of points available on the display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ZOOM ON Switches on the zoom function 9 4 9 3 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See State on page 51 Configuring the Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated e A E e e m 147 LER i r 148 AF evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain ie MAAF e WE 147 SENS amp IADEModsns AF SPAN iia iiis torri iore cep ea e e eoa sace P eoa Ea esee Eo AN Ea 147 ISENSe JADEModn AE SPAN FU LL gie
145. dulation bandwidth determines the span of the signal that is demodulated It is not the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter but the useful bandwidth which is distortion free with regard to phase and amplitude Therefore the following formulas apply e AM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency FM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x frequency deviation modulation frequency e PM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency x 1 phase deviation demodulation bandwidth must be increased by the carrier offset in addition to the requirement described above This also applies if FM or PM AC coupling has been selected i If the center frequency of the analyzer is not set exactly to the signal frequency the In general the demodulation bandwidth should be as narrow as possible to improve the S N ratio The residual FM caused by noise floor and phase noise increases dra matically with the bandwidth especially with FM For help on determining the adequate demodulation bandwidth see Determining the demodulation bandwidth on page 110 R amp S VSE K7 Measurement Basics 4 3 AF Filters Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals A CCITT filter allows you to evaluate the signal by simu lating the characteristics of human hearing 4 4 Time Domain Zoom For evaluations in the time domain the demodulated data for a particular time span can be extrac
146. e JADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE eese ene 161 SENSe JADEMod n FM AFSPectrum RESUIE esee enne nennen 180 SENSe ADEMod n FM AF SPectrum TYPE tette then ttn tern nni r aa 161 SENSe JADEMod n FM OFFSet 186 SENSe JADEMod n FM TDOMain RESUIt eese nennen neret 180 SENSe ADEMods n FM TDOMain E TYPE ertt intr t terri eee ees 161 SENSe JADEMoasri MTM Sroa a a a a a 131 SENSe JADEMod n PM AFSPectrum RESUIt essent rennen SASAE a iaai 180 SENSe ADEMods n 7 PM AFSPectrum TYPE sisirin aii ir iiaeia SENSe JADEModsri PMIRPOInI X asns ee SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult SENSe ADEMods n PM TDOMain T YPE ict dti titre SENSe JADEModsn PRESSGERESTOFe ioi o o mer tete ead a iade iU PU a cui EE D Ce e SENSe JADEModsn PRESCESTORG rre tte rather eher Yer aye KERNEL PR CY RC pu Fax ERR FER EX Yee ERES SENSe ADEModsn PRESet STANdard rant neret a ei ii casted SENSe JADEModsn REENGIU2 oii ede cete a 131 SENSE AD oeil p M STT EEN SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution eene 133 SENSe ADEMods n SPECtrum RESU IE iiic retra traer er re rente lr rrr EE RENE 180 SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum
147. e a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 128 INPut EATT AUTO on page 128 INPut EATT on page 127 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 5 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 34 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the instrument in use can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC 5 3 3 Input and Frontend Settings AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 119 Impedance Input Settings For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels
148. e are not allowed If gaps are desired two separate limit lines must be defined and then both enabled e The entered frequencies or times need not necessarily be selectable in R amp S VSE A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range The minimum frequency for a data point is 200 GHz the maximum frequency is 200 GHz For the time range representation negative times may also be entered The allowed range is 1000 s to 1000 s 4 Analog Demod 1 RF Spectrum 1AP Cirw eil d Span 50 0 kHz X Value 1 0000002 GHz 999 999051 MHz 1 000000999 GHz Fig 6 3 Example for an upper limit line Limits and Margins Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal A margin is similar to a limit but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range It can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached The margin is not indicated by a separate line in the display but if it is violated a warning is displayed Margins are defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line reese User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 95 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit Limits can be defined relative to the reference level the beginning of the time scale or the center frequency or as absolute valu
149. e assigned limit line is active One limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously If any of the Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECKk on page 226 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show compat Only compatible lines ible Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Show all All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits sub folder of the main installation folder if not restricted by Show lines for all modes setting Show lines for all modes Included Lines in Overview View Filter If activated default limit lines from all applications are displayed Otherwise only lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application In this case a warning is displayed when you try to store the limit line Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application X Offset Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times x axis hori zontally This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are def
150. e center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to its new maximum the demodulation bandwidth lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt FreqRange gt RST 5 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Span on page 55 See RF Full Span on page 55 Post processing AF Filters The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function AF filters are only available for AM or FM time domain evaluations ISENSeTPIETerensAWLEIghted S TATE uos cut re te ire Ph et eei 150 ET Ve EE 150 SENSe FIETeren GOIR WEIGhted STAT 2e rhet nerit ne Rn RR EES 150 SENSe FIL Tercns CCIRTUNWeiobtedt STATel 150 SENS ec IL MSP OLD iege etd eget cat rot tae aero tate ere tei bene dax 151 SENSe JFILTer n DEMPhasis TGONStanl 2 2 2 usiniers 151 SENSeJFIETer n DEMPhasis STAT etae rhet eee Regie e RE Rer ee 151 SENSe FILTeren HPASs FREQuency ABSol te 2 riter eene nain 151 SENSe FIL TercnzHPAGeEbREOuencv MANual nennen 152 SENSE FIL Ke HPASS KEN d E 152 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute esses 152 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency MANUal cesses nnne nnne nnn 153 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency RELative eese 153 SENSe FIETer ns EPASS ISTATG cetero eindanna aai ama enema 153 Configuring the Measurement SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe State
151. e command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event R amp S VSE K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements ee ee eae s CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALC
152. e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the A In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window same evaluation are configured identically e Retrieving Trace ROSUItS 00 c ccccieceseccsteseeeceeecuteevecectneeseceetepeecececnaeecaadennnenca 179 e Export Trace E 182 e Retrieving Result Summary Values eee ced 184 9 6 1 Retrieving Trace Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the trace results in a remote environment SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt essen 179 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative TDOMainl RE Gu 179 IGENZGeJADEMod nz AM REI ativeAtGbechum RE Gul 179 SENSeTJADEMog en FMI PDOMain RESUlIU recited tortor tete nete 180 SENSe JADEMod n FM AFSPectrum RESUIE cicero eiiiai 180 SENSe ADEMod n PM TDOMain RESUIt eese nenne 180 SENSe ADEMod n PM AFSPectrum RESUIE Lies enne 180 SENSe JADEMod n SPECtr m RESUll 2 cuocere ceci eee c eee edv aiui 180 FORNSIBDATA EE 181 EE ett EE 181 SENSe ADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt Retrieving Results SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum RESult l
153. e of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 9 5 3 General Window Commands The following commands are required to work with windows independently of the application Retrieving Results Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel DISPlayEWINDBewsns SEL amp cl cilio ciuis a to Fare ene aaa Dior TAS 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Usage Setting only 9 6 Retrieving Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the results from an Analog Demodulation measurement in a remote environment with a specific evaluation
154. e position can have two different values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 218 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA on page 219 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 222 Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the Edit Limit Line dia log box Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the Edit Limit Line dialog box Shift x Shifts the x value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see X Offset on page 100 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol SHIFt on page 219 Shift y Shifts the y value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 100 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer SHIFt on page 220 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer SHIFt on page 223 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Defining Limit Lines Limit lines are configured in the Lines Config dialog box To display this dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and then the vertical Limit Lines Config tab e Select the Limits gt Line menu item The following tasks are described here How to find compatible limit lines on page 104 How to
155. e t eR sin Pede C 28 Phase D VIATION sept Deviation scaling e Bj ec Phase noise measurement Activating Deactivating se 91 DG ACV ARNG resis eret oen ere Duane oe deat 92 Marker ii oicun anea aaa E ANE 90 Remote control rtt iio cett since 216 Phase Wrap AGVAN E 52 PM Spectrum Evaluation method 5 sinasara 15 PM Time Domain Evaluation method ssssssseeeeeeee 13 Position Limit Ia 103 Presetting Channels 1 2 nrc arb nion ska sat cach vea 34 lisi MC 45 Programming examples Statistics so ois cis 227 229 Q Quick Config WAGES P 74 R ato e 61 ele 62 ip 47 Display croi nte tee en eere 9 Remote control rare esee en 133 Reference at n 84 87 Markel adiri ern exe eta ve ta erre 84 Reference level sirsat aaea araa e aeae 38 Auto level 39 69 BIEN 9 Suc M raae aae ada E aN E 39 Offset displayed eene een 9 Selen Pere M ML 62 Unit 38 39 PEU 38 Reference marker SEENEN deed d ENNEN 82 Reference value oec tes cea dose er uev ea 60 POSITION oireisiin ttr eoe e cade rie estes 60 Remote commands Basics ofi SVO gc eerte rte 112 Booleari values 5 2 2 2 ertet tier tere 115 CapitaliZatiO
156. ea of the value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal Working with Spectrograms Example Fig 4 5 Linear color curve shape 0 colors are distributed evenly over the complete result range In the color map based on the linear color curve the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm is covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Fig 4 6 Spectrogram with default color curve The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow which occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the
157. easurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 158 5 6 4 2 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluations and the result summary Scaling 9 Logarithmic Linear Percent Linear with Unit Ref Level Position 100 0 Specifics for 3 RF Spectrum S CIS EE 61 Ref Level E EE 62 PUTO SCAG ui 62 Sa MEME E 62 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB 5 6 5 Demodulation For Analog Demodulation measurements time domain scaling is defined in Hz default 500 kHz Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 129 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in 9e where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 130 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 129 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axi
158. ed by averaging lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt IMMediate AVERage IMMediate The current measurement results are used to calculate the FM offset AVERage The measurement results that were averaged over the given number of measurements are used to calculate the FM offset If no average measurement was active during the last measure ment sequence only the SENSe ADEMod n FM OFFSet IMMediate command will return a correct result data to calcu late the offset are taken from the last measured data set SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet AVERage Will cause a query error in this case Analyzing Results DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets up demodulator parameters to execute 30 measurements DEM FM AVER OFF OFF elects FM results to perform averaging NIT WAI tarts measurement and waits for sync DEM FM OFFS IMM eads FM offset of last measurement of the sequence of 30 DEM FM OFFS AVER Reads FM offset averaged over 30 measurements Example HNP gt ZI Usage Query only SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM RPOint X Time This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the software this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM RPO X MAX lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters
159. ed instrument to be used for input Input Coupling The RF input of the instrument in use can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 119 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the instrument in use can be set to 50 Q or 750 Input and Frontend Settings 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 120 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function may require an additional hardware option on the instrument in use Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 119 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG prese
160. eesteeeeeeeeeesseeees 245 Frame count DONKEY raciema me e a 49 Free Run aler ide oe etnies rco c b ms end ionem dre 44 Frequency Belt le UL ue RE 52 Deemphasis filter Dewatoft 22 Deviation SCAN acasan 59 Remote control iis e casa cael aes a a E ENE ri M MOT Frontend settings cse i n eod reo Eed H Hardware settings Displayed E 9 High pass filter TA BRIT MEET 56 High pass filter Sue 119 RF Tue ccce mr t pe i erre erede 36 History ee tee TEE 77 History Depth feci M 77 Hold Trace setti EEN 73 Hysteresis Lower Auto level osinn ere 70 Rr M 45 Upper Auto level erc 70 l UO data EXpoOllitig WE 74 UO Power hale GT 44 Trigger level remote esee 137 IF Power Trigger level remote esee 137 Impedance ios E 120 Setting Input jo V o e EE 35 40 Coupling remote accetti corn nci ties 119 RUE AA Settings i INPUL SOUECOS ront i pite er eoa tn egene 34 te Tu 35 Radio frequency RF A 35 Inserting Limitline values oce tereti ees 103 Instruments leie 35 K Keys MKR e M MKR FUNCT L Limit check Activating Deactivating sesiapa pa 104 Remote control m acce Limit NES icr rrr cem ee Activating Deactivating A 99 Ve cnr ner rrr rate tis 101 Compatibility 94 99 Compatible
161. ef Value AF Coupling FM PM only Table 1 12 List of predefined standards and settings Squelch level Setting AM Broadcast FM Narrowband FM Broadcast Frequency Set None Default tling Demod band 100 kHz 100 kHz 400 kHz 5 MHz 5 MHz width Aquisition time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 10 ms 62 5 us Input coupling AC AC AC AC 30 dBm 20 dBm Windows RF Spectrum RF Spectrum RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Time Domain AM Time Domain FM Time Domain FM Time Domain RF Time Domain Result Summary AM Spectrum FM Spectrum FM Spectrum Result Summary Result Summary Result Summary AF filter High 20 kHz 50 Hz pass AF filter Low 15 kHz 3 kHz 150 kHz pass RF Spectrum Span 50 kHz 25 kHz 400 kHz AM FM Time Domain Time domain 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms zoom Dev per division 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz AM FM Spectrum Start freq 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz The Frequency Settling scenario requires a manually defined trigger R amp S VSE K7 Reference Setting AM Broadcast FM Narrowband FM Broadcast Frequency Set None Default tling Stop freq 15 kHz 5 kHz 63 33 kHz Ref value 5 kHz 75 kHz The Frequency Settling scenario requires a manually defined trigger AA A 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data
162. efines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Results Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 Usage Event Analyzing Results Manual opera
163. el 38 39 Upper Level Hysteresls uc eo ent trt et neto b n 70 V View filter Limit iNES E 99 Visible Limit Ia 99 W Weighting filter AP TIMERS Ab 57 Window title bar information ssessseeeeeeenne 9 Windows Adding remote Closing remote Configuring Maximizing remote Ze td nne 167 Querying remote sss 171 172 175 Replacing remote erect ene 173 176 Spectrogram remote 2 107 Splitting remote tiet ers 167 Types remote uem de ae 170 174 X X axis Bu d HE 102 X Offset Bu d H 100 X value MARK P 82 Y Y axis Bu ug H 102 fen 62 Y Offset Bu ue UE 100 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating ssee 36 Activating Deactivating remote 120 Z Zero Phase Reference Position 1c rice ees 52 Zooming Activating remote ue crine eite 231 Area Multiple mode remote Area remote 230 Deactivating so 107 Multiple mode ntn nre rre 106 Multiple mode remote 231 232 acu 230 Restoring original display 107 Single mode 106 Single mode remote AAA 230 Time doma eere recte ice 23 51
164. elected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 192 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 192 Marker Type v a Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 192 Reference Marker Defines a mark
165. ency AF filter settings used for demodulation also apply to the online output However a maximum of two high pass low pass or deemphasis fil ters can be active at the same time if analog demodulation output is active See chapter 5 6 3 AF Filter on page 55 I Online Demod Output On Output Selection EE Focus A AC Cutoff Frequency 100 0 Hz Phones Output 7 Online Demodulation Output State sss eene 66 Output Salectlolii EE 66 P zetp m H 67 AC Cutoff D 67 xao 280 EE 67 Online Demodulation Output State Enables or disables online demodulation output If enabled the demodulated audio fre quencies are output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the instrument in use Optionally you can output the demodulated signal to the PHONES connector on the front panel see Phones Output on page 67 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 121 Output Selection Selects the result display whose results are output Only time domain results can be selected All currently active time domain result displays are listed Current Focus dynamically switches to the currently selected window Thus you can easily change the output signal simply by selecting the windows in the display If a win dow is selected that does not contain a time domain result display the selection is ignored and the previous setting is maintained Outpu
166. equencies that are more prone to interferences In this case the emphasis function must be reversed after demodulation This is done by the deem phasis filter The deemphasis filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 25 us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Depending on the deemphasis filter a minimum demodulation bandwidth is required for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency The following table shows the dependencies 5 6 4 Deemphasis us 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us Max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz Required demodulation bandwidth 2200kHz 2100kHz 250kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 151 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 151 Deactivating all AF Filters The All Filter Off button deactivates all AF filters for the selected evaluation Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 150 Scaling The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed 5 6 4 1 Demodulation They are configured in the Scaling tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is dis
167. er detector type trade mode 6 AF coupling AC DC only in AF time domains if applicable 7 Reference value at the defined reference position 8 Dock undock window function 9 Close window function Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation RF Spectrum CF Center frequency Sweep points Span measured span of input signal RF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal AF Spectrum AF CF center fre Sweep points AF Span evaluated span quency of demodula ted signal AF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal For most modes the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the diagram footer In zoom mode the rounded number of currently displayed points are indicated 3 Measurements and Result Displays The data that was measured by the R amp S VSE can be evaluated using various different methods In the Analog Demodulation application up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The results can be displayed as abso lute deviations or relative to a reference value or level D The abbreviation AF for Audio Frequency refers to the demodulated AM FM or PM signal Result display windows For each measurement a se
168. er as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 192 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 191 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 191 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker gt Marker to Trace menu item If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Re
169. er when signal reaches 500 MHz LAY ADD WIND 1 BEL XTIM FM AFSP Add an FM Spectrum result display below FM Time Domain ADEM FM AFSP WRIT AVER OFF OFF OFF OFF Defines two traces in the FM Spectrum 1 Clear write 2 average ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 FM POS 500 30 Set analog demodulator to execute 30 sweeps with 32000 samples each at a sample rate of 8 MHz use FM trigger trigger on positive slope with a pretrigger offset of 500 samples INIT CONT OFF Stop continuous sweep INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 30 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Queries the carrier power Result 10 37 dBm CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM SIN RES Queries the signal to noise and distortion ratio from the FM Spectrum Result 65 026 dB CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM THD RES Queries the total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal from the FM Spectrum Result 66 413 dB CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FERR Queries the FM carrier offset frequency error for the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 649 07 Hz ADEM FM OFFS AVER Queries FM carrier offset averaged over 30 measurements Result 600 Hz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Programming Example Retrieve the trace data of the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400
170. es Relative scaling is suitable for example if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero span or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain Thresholds If the y axis for the limit line data points uses relative scaling an additional absolute threshold can be defined for the limit check In this case both the threshold value and the relative limit line must be exceeded before a violation occurs e a seseo resulting limit AM Z d N iV 4 oa uoc absolute threshold 5j 4 IR EN d E m a a55334390 00490904 A relative limit line vitu Mtl Offsets and Shifting A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally Two different methods to do so are available An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values or positions of the individual data points This option is only available if relative scaling is used Thus a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically e Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus changing the position of the line in the dia gram Limit Check Results A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated Visibility setting Only the specified Traces to be Checked are compared with the active limit lines The status of the limi
171. es lt t gt is irrelevant For AF spectrum displays only the parameters LINear and LOGarithmic are permit ted Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Configuring the Measurement Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Deviation on page 61 See Scaling on page 62 9 4 7 Configuring Data Acquisition The following remote commands are required to configure which data is to be acquired and then demodulated in a remote environment SBENSe ADEMod n MTIMe 322 retro rec aa Ea eee NTa 131 IGENSeIADEModens RL ENG 131 SENSE ele SA SE WEE 132 SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution sess 133 SENSe JADEMod rn S EE 133 IEN Ge IBANDwidplDWiDb DEMod eene enn nnn nnne nnne nns enne 133 ISENS amp BANDwidlh BWIDth DEMadzT RE Eege ae eroe o nhau o e on au cu tante 133 SENSe BANDwidth RESolutioti 21 12 11210 coti REENEN 134 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce tntteentetentnttenetetet tert tette t test os 134 SENSE ISWEep PONES ere eet e aget Gael tnn re o c anced 135 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe Time This command defines the measurement time for analog demodulation lt n gt is irrelevant Para
172. es as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input Frontend See chapter 5 3 Input and Frontend Settings on page 34 2 Trigger See chapter 5 4 Trigger Source Settings on page 42 3 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 5 Data Acquisition on page 46 4 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 6 Demodulation on page 49 5 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 71 6 Optionally Outputs See chapter 5 7 1 Output Settings on page 63 5 3 5 3 1 Input and Frontend Settings To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview or select a setting in the channel s global info bar to open the corresponding dialog box Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 117 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file See Setup Stand ard on page 31 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in t
173. esult depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe State This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off lt n gt m are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the time domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode Return values lt TimeX1 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds lt Timex2 gt a
174. ete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode Return values lt Frequency gt lt frequency 1 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz lt frequency 2 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer ence marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100000000 200000000 meaning that the first marker position is at 100 MHz the second marker position is at 200 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 94 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt QFactor gt Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode Analyzing Results Return values Distance The r
175. etting see Trigger Level on page 45 Thus a periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed It is recommended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal Note that which trigger sources are available depends on the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 Trigger Source Settings Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 External Trigger lt X gt Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the specified input connector or input channel of the instrument in use meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 45 Note Which input and output connectors are available depends on the connected instrument For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the instrument s Getting Started manual Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 TRIG SOUR EXT4 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 140 UO Power Trigger Source Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the resolution bandwidth setting for data acquisi tion see Resolution Bandwidth on page 47 Remote command TR
176. f the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword i
177. gger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 46 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring the Measurement Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXT EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 Trigger signal from the corresponding TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the instrument in use or the oscillo Scope s corresponding input channel For details on the connectors see the instrument s Getting Star ted manual RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications MAGNitude For offline input from a file rather than an instrument Triggers on a specified signal level RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 43 See Free Run on page 44 See External Trigger lt X gt on page 44 See UO Power on p
178. gram that can be expanded to define the zoom area A B Multiple zoom mode multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram ES A Zoom off displays the diagram in its original size Reference of Toolbar Functions Table 1 10 Functions in the Marker toolbar Icon Description e Place new marker Select marker ML T v Marker type normal A v Marker type delta A v Global peak N IX Absolute peak N J Currently only for GSM application Y Next peak to the left N Y Next peak to the right N Next peak up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next peak down for spectrograms only search in previous frames NY Global minimum v Next minimum left bd v Next minimum right b Next min up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next min down for spectrograms only search in previous frames Set marker value to center frequency CF v Set reference level to marker value REF E All markers off IR Marker search configuration d Marker configuration Table 1 11 Functions in the AutoSet toolbar Icon Description Auto level LEVEL Auto frequency FREQ Predefined Standards and Settings Icon Description Auto trigger R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto frame R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto search R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD application only Auto sc
179. gt lt k gt are irrelevant Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check Usage SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Programming Example Using Limit Lines The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environ ment Example Configuring Limit LINES rte t rr E eed tren 227 e Example Performing a Limit Check 229 Example Configuring Limit Lines This example demonstrates how to configure 2 limit lines an upper and a lower limit for a measurement in a remote environment feeeBeRBeRRRRRR Configuing the limit lines CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 Names limit line 1 FM1 CALC LIM1 CONT MODE ABS Selects absolute scaling for the horizontal axis CALC LIM1 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines CALC LIM Selects CALC LIM Selects CALC LIM Defines CALC LIM Defines are stil CALC LIMI1 Shifts t CALC LIMI1 Defines CALC
180. gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 RST 200 dBm Analyzing Results Manual operation See Threshold on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME Name This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Parameters Name String containing the limit line name RST REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation See Name on page 101 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT Unit This command defines the unit of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Unit If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S VSE either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin lt Margin gt This command d
181. h the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of captured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the measurement and the measured trace data is stored Spectrogram displays are continued even after sin gle measurements unless they are cleared manually The maximum number of frames that you can capture depends on the number of Sweep points that are analyzed during the measurement The scaling of the time axis y axis is not configurable However you can enlarge the spectrogram display to the full window size using the State Full Displaying individual frames The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer The current frame dis played at the top of the diagram is frame number 0 Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index e g 10 You can display the spectrum dia gram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number Color Maps The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs You can define e Which colors to use Color scheme Which value range to apply the color scheme to e How the colors are distributed
182. he Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Input and Frontend Settings The source and characteristics of the input signal to be demodulated are configured in the Input dialog box P To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select one of the following menu items from the Input amp Output menu Input Source Amplitude Frequency e OPE SOMOS i eege ege EE EES 34 LEE ooo RT 37 amp CoU E M 41 Input Source Settings The R amp S VSE can control the input sources of the connected instruments e Rado Frequency IF coo ci dede x diene alien ave ative e d ecce dace Enti 35 Lamuenl i mee EE 36 5 3 1 1 Input and Frontend Settings Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the instrument in use is Radio Frequency Input Coupling VQ File Impedance High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Radio Freqiuiehey SEIte ieu eaa cor remite tede dese apte need edepol 35 Insul En EE 35 Ip WC OUD ING EE 35 PCO ANCE me 35 High Pass E iieri tede rti ena tdi eee 36 Kale e E 36 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 120 Instrument Specifies a configur
183. he demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF STARt on page 148 AF Stop Defines the stop frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Demodulation The maximum AF stop frequency corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF STOP on page 148 AF Span Defines the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum span is DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF SPAN on page 147 AF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to the maximum of DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF SPAN FULL on page 147 5 6 2 2 RF Evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Note that for RF data the center frequency and demodulation bandwidth corre spond to the settings defined in the Input and Data Acquisition configuration Center 13 25 GHz Span 5 0 MHz Demodulation Bandwidth 5 0 MHz RF Full Span DBW Specifics for 3 RF Spectrum m Center NEUENOY ERE 54 jar m 55 Demodulation Bandwidlli 2 2 1 comete tere me ce dee EE ERR 55 RPE UNS pP H A 55 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal 0 Hz lt age s fiex fmax and Spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet 5 6 3 Demodulation Note For file
184. he position of markers in the diagram CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt AOF F esten stssasssse aE iniaa e saisis 188 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz LUNKTOMAbRkercmz see ne sss nn nnne nans 188 CALCulatesmsMARKersme STAT aai ceat rhet atte ruth tutta d eo enata dee rene 189 CAL Gulate nsMARKerems t TRAD nri reduc ocos etse se fice espaces ense d a co ses dux eed e Roda 189 GALOulate n TR 189 CAL CulatesmMARKersSmstY E 190 CAL Gulate ms DELETamarker ms2ADFEF 5 irren oen dei ee des unh 190 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk eser ennt nennt nies nh nnne 191 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK TOMAhkercmz senes 191 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL TamarkersMm gt MODE tae ext ere entere de eR ERA 191 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 192 GALGulate n DELTamarkerem STATe cancri rrt ten te thu Dne hne RR IRR Rc 192 GALECulatesns DELTamarkersmo TRAQ caasa EENS onn dnec cba nean deze pxx dem EEN 192 Ee DE RT NEE E EEN 192 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative senes nnns 193 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN ss ssenstss isi sss i sisse nr sanas 193 x CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 83 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active no
185. hich are allowed from a device under test DUT When transmitting information in TDMA systems e g GSM the amplitude of the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified tolerance band The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line Then the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations of the upper or lower limits GO NOGO test The R amp S VSE supports limit lines with a maximum of 200 data points Eight of the limit lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously The number of limit lines stored in the software is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used Compatibility Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings if the following applies R amp S VSE K7 Analysis EH e The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting e The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep tion of dB based units all dB based units are compatible with each other Validity Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated e Each limit line must consist of a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points e The frequencies times for each data point must be defined in ascending order however for any single frequency or time two data points may be entered to define a vertical segment of a limit line e Gaps in frequency or tim
186. ically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Common Suffixes 9 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 9 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 113 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 9 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 9 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of the
187. ile Export Format on page 245 for details Parameters lt State gt Usage Manual operation ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 SCPI confirmed See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 75 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 182 Parameters Selection Usage Manual operation SINGIe Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle SCPI confirmed See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 75 Retrieving Results 9 6 3 Retrieving Result Summary Values The result summary contains measurement values that are calculated from the trace data For details see Result Summary on page 17 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult 184 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 184 CAL Culate nzM Abkerzmz FUNGCHonADEMod EMIREGutetsI nnee enrere 184 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 184
188. in the active measurement channel BN deel Ree ee KE 170 LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDoOw esses nennen en nn nennen ener 171 LAYouEGEOBAEIDENUSEWINDOW 2 iacet voe tt ttt t teta ae a ett 172 LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDOW 2 cerro etra eoo oaa cota rici eed ooa aded 172 LAY out GEOBAlSEPLEaeS WINDOW EE 173 LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow lt ExChanName gt lt ExWinName gt lt Direction gt lt NewChanName gt lt NewWinT ype gt This command adds a window to the display next to an existing window The new win dow may belong to a different channel than the existing window To replace an existing window use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Parameters lt ExChanName gt string Name of an existing channel lt ExWinName gt string Name of the existing window within the lt ExChanName gt chan nel the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow TAB Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow TAB The new window is added as a new tab in the specified existing window lt NewChanName gt string Name of the channel for which a new window is to be added lt NewWinType gt string Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for avai
189. in use should behave default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger e The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows for IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 157 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 68 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 68 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 69 Auto Settings Configuration iier tee ense ae estre rne Yee 69 L Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value nea 69 L Upper Level lI Res 70 Fares Level Hysteresis as cubana ba ed E dct dined tula 70 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes Auto Frequency Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 39 e AF Auto Scale on page 61 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 155 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq The instrument in use adjusts the center frequency automatically Adjusting Settings Automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S
190. ined by absolute values for the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet on page 218 Y Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y axis levels or linear units such as volt vertically This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet on page 220 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer OFFSet on page 223 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY on page 225 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k DELete on page 225 Disable All Lines Disable all limit lines in one step Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k STATe on page 226 6 5 2 2 Limit Line Details Limit lines details are configured in the Edit Line dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Edit or Copy To buttons in the Line Config dialog box Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Mme Threshold 200 0 dBm Comment Margin 0 0 Hz XAxis He Absolute gt Linear M Y Axis He Absolute Upper T Position Value 7 ete cence 1000 mt 2000 nee Shift x Shift y Save
191. ines the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 22 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation Remote command SENSe ADEMod n MTIMe on page 131 Resolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition The available range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 134 Capture Settings The capture settings define how much data from the input signal is acquired and then demodulated They are configured in the Capture tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box Meas Time AQT 62 5 us Points 1001 Capture Count 0 Select Frame 0 o EN Continue Frame Frame Count 1 Spectrogram Clear Specifics for 2 AM Spectrum Fig 5 1 Capture settings with active spectrogram gt To display this dialog box do one of the following Data Acquisition e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and switch to the Capture tab e Select the Meas Setup gt Capture menu item Measurement Time AOT 48 POMS CE 48 Capture e EE 48 Seleciing a frame to display 2 edt t rt tertio seda eee nde tun 48 escas c 49 arie T
192. ing the output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector on the rear panel of the instrument in use it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector CAUTION Risk of hearing damage To protect your hearing make sure that the vol ume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones Note If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled both general online demodulation output see Online Demodulation Output State on page 66 and Phones Output adjust the volume setting using the rotary knob on the front panel Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes on page 122 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Adjusting Settings Automatically Depending on the instrument in use some settings can be adjusted by the instrument automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a mea surement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting from the R amp S VSE select the corre sponding function in the Auto Set toolbar or in the configuration dialog box for the set ting where available Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the instrument
193. ings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation appli cation Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the measurement configura tion Remote Commands for R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Measure ments Remote commands required to configure and perform R amp S VSE Analog Demodu lation application measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks in the software are provided in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 5 Typographical Conventions 1 2 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphic
194. ion For AM Spectrum displays the marker result equals the amplitude noise at the marker position The noise power density is measured at each marker for which the phase noise func tion is activated and set in relation to the measured carrier power A reference marker is not required In the marker table display the phase noise is indicated as the marker function result 6 4 3 4 Marker Function Configuration Special marker functions can be selected via the Marker Function dialog box To display this dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab e Select the Marker gt Marker Function menu item The fixed reference marker is described under Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application n dB down L Phase Noise j Reference Fixed L Marker Peak List j All Functions Off Specifics for 2 FM Spectrum i Not all marker functions are available for all evaluations The following table indicates which functions are available for which evaluations Evaluation n dB down Phase Noise Reference Fixed AF time X AF spectrum X X X RF time X X RF spectrum X X X For details on special marker functions see chapter 6 4 3 Special Marker Functions on page 87 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap
195. irrelevant Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 192 Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See vw Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 See Marker State on page 81 See Marker Type on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessar
196. k AM 1 2 pk pk Detectors rms amp modulation Counter depth modulation frequency lowpa carrier i frequency FM demodulator Quen Coupling Trace Inter Trace Fein e fr ones gt FM vaco peak FM k Detectors 1 2 pk pk amp rms pude modulation frequency Trace Inter Trace Arithmetic Detector gt PM trace TL peak PM peak Detectors 1E pk pk amp rms Counter modulation frequency Fig 4 1 Block diagram of software demodulator Demodulation Bandwidth The AM DC FM DC and PM DC raw data of the demodulators is fed into the Trace Arithmetic block that combines consecutive data sets Possible trace modes are Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold and Average The output data of the Trace Arith metic block can be read via remote control SENS ADEM evaluation RES see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult on page 179 The collected measured values are evaluated by the selected detector The result is displayed on the screen and can be read out via remote control In addition important parameters are calculated e Acounter determines the modulation frequency for AM FM and PM average power carrier power RF power average frequency carrier frequency offset FM e The modulation depth or the frequency or phase deviation the deviations are determined from the trace data AC coupling is possible with FM and PM display 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth The demo
197. l sssssss 164 Display rte 24 Frames remote control 164 History depth rent eee nere 77 Markers remote Control sssees 195 iren D 27 Selecting frames 48 77 Iu qe M 76 E SD EE 7T Size remolg EEN 167 TIMES frames noe rtt Erbe a na 26 Value range n ertt tte rri eterne 28 Spectrum Dernodulation 2 m iana tiee 52 Squelch ip dha 50 Levelt eegene deeg 51 E lee Ti de NEE 144 IER 50 Standards Predefined c rien tei teni e I eo dd cta 243 Presetting ege see Digital standards Statistics Programming example esses 227 229 Step size OTTEN 84 Markers remote control sees 194 Storage location Settings caer et terere eer e 31 Subwindows nee TE In EE 77 Suffixes COMMON ET 116 Remote commands oo eerte 113 Sweep points BIER 10 T THD WE 18 Querying remote 186 Troubleshooting 2110 B R 63 Threshold Limit In i 52 2 2 rnc na x aci cria ccc 96 102 Time domain zoom uc D1 Rue EE 52 Hic p seed 52 Stata C I AEN 51 Time frames COmMUNUING rete p TTE RE RP Navigating ETT per sweep Selecting Spectrograms Time per division Displayed E 10 Toolbars Jer D 242 Control we 241 Functions 23
198. l To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow command Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Configuring the Result Display Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command To remove a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window typ
199. l generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut VEIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 64 See Level on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Configuring the Measurement Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S VSE has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects
200. lable parameter values Configuring the Result Display Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ Analyzer l RIGH IQ Analyzer2 FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 in the channel IQ Analyzer Usage Query only Table 9 1 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPec AM Spectrum trum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right for each active channel The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax ChannelName 1 WindowName 1 WindowIndex 1 WindowName n Win dowIndex n ChannelName m lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Win dowlIndex n Return values lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as
201. late n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe essere nnne 196 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm GGbamG Atea rtt enne nennen nnns 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea essen 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee n 197 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK eese 197 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK ene 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK eese 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sse 197 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe eese 197 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum DEI ow ene 198 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOwW essen 198 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GGbRamvMANimum NENT 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sees 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK cesses 198 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GbECirooram v MAximumfPDEAkRT renerne neneennne 198 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWVe esee 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWVe eeeeeeeeeeee 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELOW enne 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOw eese 198 CALCulate n MARKer m S
202. le spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 202 Analyzing Results The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the ho
203. lector if available on the instrument in use An internal YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use ensures that image fre quencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use which may lead to image frequency display Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 120 5 3 1 2 UO File Input Alternatively to live data input from a connected instrument measurement data to be analyzed by the R amp S VSE software can also be provided offline by a stored data file This allows you to perform a measurement on any instrument store the results to a file and analyze the stored data partially or as a whole at any time using the R amp S VSE software The Input Source settings defined in the Input dialog box are identical to those con figured for a specific channel in the Measurement Group Setup window See Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data in the R amp S VSE User Manual 5 3 2 Input and Frontend Settings c temp IqRecording 1481 iq tar Select File Saved by VSE 0 80a 51 Beta Comment Date amp time 2014 11 12T11 19 35 Sample rate 32 MHz Number of samples 1301 Duration of signal 40 6562 us Number of channels 1 FAS cl A TT T m 37 hings c 37 UO File State Activates input from
204. lects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion on page 163 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO on page 164 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 160 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected The Capture Count determines the number of averaging procedures Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear s
205. lects the unit for angles for PM display lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT ANGL Parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Manual operation See Phase Unit Rad Deg on page 63 UNIT lt n gt THD Mode Selects the unit for THD measurements lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT THD Parameters Mode DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT THD PCT Manual operation See THD Unit DB on page 63 Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 68 ie e E ee etit toa deo cate e eese ee eee re aded a ec etis 155 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURAOlion 2 22 22 172222222 rtt eter tuner rape co pp EE ReEEEEER 156 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE essent 156 ISGENZGelADlust CONEioure Hv teresle LOVer eene 157 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer 2 orem ace ceu aa REENEN 157 SENSeJADJuSECONFIGgure TRIG ina EES ENEE 157 SENSe TABJustiF RE QUGSRCY i ianiai e RER Conpda one Porte Le See 157 ie ctae ed ra tad ee etel c ete eee boe vb cnt batte 158 SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuoUs e eresieiiesese eee e eno a saecu nsa naniii 158 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates
206. line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 144 Selected Trace Defines the trace used to determine the results in the Result Summary Time Domain Zoom Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and displayed in more detail This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point represents a large time span The time domain zoom func tion distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise Note that the time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evaluation for the current window This function is only available for evaluations in the time domain Tip In addition to the Time Domain Zoom a graphical zoom is available for all dia gram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same For detail
207. lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt on page 165 Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 165 5 6 Demodulation Demodulation parameters can be configured in the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you select the Demod Settings button in the Overview e Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demo 50 e Demodulation SpoGIUlTk souci edere rir eere d ce reinado vida 52 AE uu ce EET 55 LER COMING Re 58 LE c M 62 Demodulation 5 6 1 Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed They are configured in the Demod tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Demod tab e Select the Meas Setup gt Demod menu item Spectrum AF Filter Scaling Unit Settings Time Domain Zoom zouh state gu JR state o WS Squelch Level 20 0 dBm Start 005 AF Coupling D BCE EH Length ie Manus Selected Trace 1 62 5 us EN Specifics for 1 FM Time Domain 7 i em vaieaeeesst 5
208. ly to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 87 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT anniina aiaia 206 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nasus 206 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 206 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt eene nnns 207 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 207 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT enses nn nens nn nn nn nans 207 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese nenne 207 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 208 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion In the spect
209. mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played OFF Hides the selected trace RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH OFF OFF OFF Determines average max hold and min hold values simultane ously for the traces 1 3 of the RF time domain evaluation ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Determines only the current measurement values for trace 1 ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off SENSe AVERage n COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces for all windows n is irrelevant In case of continuous capture mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single capture mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single capture mode In continuous capture mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Configuring the Measurement
210. ments Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure ments Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation El Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation RBW 100000 Hz Resolution bandwidth VBW 30000 Hz Video bandwidth SWT 0 005 s Sweep time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG 96 with x axis LIN X Axis LIN Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Reference ASCII File Export Format File contents Description x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span gt 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Data section for individual window Window 1 Frequency Sweep Window number and name Trace 1 Selected trace Trace Mode AVERAGE Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVER AGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Detector set AUTOPEAK MAXPEAK MINPEAK AVER AGE RMS SAMPLE QUASIPEAK Values 1001 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360
211. menu items for Analog Demodulation Menu item Description Trace x Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is highlighted blue Copy Trace Copies trace data to another trace Spectrogram Trace Opens the Traces configuration dialog box A 1 2 4 Marker Menu The Marker menu provides access to marker specific functions This menu is application specific Table 1 4 Marker menu items for Analog Demodulation Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Select marker x e Select Marker on page 86 Marker to Trace Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 82 All Markers Off All Markers Off on page 83 DIA CiU Marker chapter 6 4 1 Marker Settings on page 79 Search chapter 6 4 2 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Func tions on page 85 Marker Function chapter 6 4 3 4 Marker Function Configuration on page 89 A 1 2 5 Limits Menu The Limits menu provides access to limit line functions This menu is application specific Table 1 5 Limits menu items for Analog Demodulation Menu item Description Line Opens the Line configuration dialog box see chapter 6 5 2 Limit Line Set tings and Functions on page 97 A 2 Reference of Toolbar Functions Common functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbars Reference of Toolbar Functions Individual
212. meters Time RST 62 5us Example ADEM MTIM 62 5us Sets the measurement time to 62 5 us Manual operation See Measurement Time AQT on page 47 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt RLENgth This command returns the record length set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM RLEN Returns the current record length Usage Query only Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SET lt SampleRate gt lt RecordLength gt TriggerSource lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt This command configures the analog demodulator of the software lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SampleRate gt numeric value The frequency at which measurement values are taken from the A D converter and stored in UO memory Allowed range see data sheet for the instrument in use RST 8 MHz lt RecordLength gt Number of samples to be stored in UO memory Range 1 to 400001 with AF filter or AF trigger active 1 to 480001 with both AF filter and AF trigger deactive RST 501 lt TriggerSource gt IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower RFPower AF AM AMRelative FM PM Note After selecting IF Power the trigger threshold can be set with the TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower command RST IMMediate lt TriggerSlope gt POSitive NEGative Used slope of the trigger signal The value indicated here will
213. mmand FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 183 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 182 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory Spectrogram Settings The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter A 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 245 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 182 6 3 Spectrogram Settings The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here For set tings on color mapping see chapter 6 3 2 Color Map Settings on page 78 Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional capture settings for spectrogram display see chapter 5 5 2 Capture Set tings on page 47 For background information see also chapter 4 5 Working with Spectrograms on page 24 e General Spectrogram Selliigjs 2 conde AANER edet
214. mmand queries the result of the signal to noise and distortion SINAD mea surement in the specified window for the specified trace Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SINAD gt The signal to noise and distortion ratio in dB Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the total harmonic distortion THD measurement in the specified window Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt THD gt Total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal in dB Usage Query only SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet lt ResultType gt This command calculates the FM carrier offset from the currently available measure ment data set If averaging has been activated before acquiring the data set using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain RESult on page 180 the averaged FM offset over several measurements can also be obtained by setting ResultType AVERage The offset thus determined differs from the one calculated by the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t on page 185 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtain
215. mmands exclusive to managing limit lines CALCulatesn BT en NEEN 225 CAL CGulatesms UMI k OP EE 225 GAEGulate mesIMIESKSTDELGIe eege REES CEPR DOR G 225 CAL Culatesn gt LIMite k gt STATO accro tne eseu SEENEN SEENEN EENS DEE 226 CALCulate n LIMit k TRACe t CHECK 226 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant Return values lt LimitLines gt String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 99 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY lt Line gt This command copies a limit line Parameters lt Line gt 1to8 number of the new limit line lt name gt String containing the name of the limit line Example CALC LIM1 COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2 CALC LIM1 COPY FM2 Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt DELete This command deletes a limit line Usage Event 9 7 2 3 Analyzing Results Manual operation See Delete Line on page 100 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe State This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note
216. mote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 189 All Markers Off y Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 188 6 4 1 2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select Analysis and switch to the verti cal Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab Select the Marker gt Marker menu item then switch to the Marker Settings tab Markers Search Marker Table Reference Fixed Linked Markers Level 70 0 Hz IE Marker Stepsize o Time 30 2 Hz AF Spectrum on Standard idu Cc Sono EM Sen Kee Marker Table Display cort EEN AER ett ett tcd aa 83 Marker Stepsize 12 cernere vr Ee nea dE eed EE upra d daas 84 Defining a Fixed Refefelice uxore te er xe ar radices SEELEN 84 Link Time Ei EE 84 le duet TEE 85 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Auto Default Up to two markers are di
217. mum LEFT on page 207 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 207 CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 207 BO tu Ei E s t B CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 208 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam ERAMe nennen ener 200 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe sse 200 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SARea sse 200 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea seen 200 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam Xv MAximumt PEART 201 Analyzing Results CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK cessus 201 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz GGbam Xv MiNimumtPEAKT nen eneneeereneeo 201 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GbEChooram SZ MiNimumt PDEART nenene ennnen 201 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sss seen 201 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe eese 201 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum DEI ow 201 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eene 201 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz GGbam vMANimumNENT 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sse 202 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGR
218. n Off Traces Settings Search Limits Left Limit P 0 0 H Sort Mode Y Value E Marker Right Limit go 160 0 MHz Maximum Number of Peaks 50 Threshold E 28 58 dB Peak Excursion Use Zoom Limits Display Marker Numbers Peak List States edet e bet eerte Ee GEESS e 92 DOM Oe EE 92 Maximum Number of Pesks edet cer tak ea E Ya Sena ek ate NENNEN naa AEN 93 Peak XO SION EEN 93 Displaying Marker NUriBere 2 eae rm De del e dar e eed c ld de 93 Exporting the Peak LISL iiie cie ime tuse see RR anette uS 93 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 212 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 211 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 211 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or f
219. n the history depth Example INIT CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep CALC SGR FRAM SEL 25 Selects frame number 25 Manual operation See Selecting a frame to display on page 48 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam HDEPth History CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram HDEPth History This command defines the number of frames to be stored in the R amp S VSE memory lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt History gt The maximum number of frames depends on the number of sweep points Range 781 to 20000 Increment 1 RST 3000 Configuring the Measurement Example CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Sets the history depth to 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 77 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SIZE Size CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the Spectrogram in the selected result display window temporarily Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the Spectrogram subwindow in the selected window to full window size Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the Spectrogram subwindow in the selected window to its original size RST SMALI Example CALC2 SPEC LARG Manual operation See State on page 77 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam STATe State CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram STATe State This command turns the spectrogram on and off lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR ON Ac
220. nal criteria for a violation Zoom Functions 9 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally Thus a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Toshift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction select the X Off set button and enter an offset value To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction select the Y Offset button and enter an offset value 3 To shift the individual data points of a limit line by a fixed value all at once a Select the Edit button b In the Edit Limit Line dialog box select the Shift x or Shift y button and define the shift width c Save the shifted data points by selecting the Save button If activated the limit line is shifted in the diagram 6 6 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar For details on the zoom functions see the R amp S VSE User Manual ine ool Dm 106 Multiple ZOOMT T 106 Restore Original Display rnt rettet d rete Eden 107 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 107 Single Zoom Ba A single zoom replaces the current diagram
221. ni 1 2 2 1 terree d 113 Character data 22116 Data blocks ain 116 Numeric values 114 Optional keywords Bebe Parameters wee 114 Dr 116 SUMIKOS EE 113 Res BW See RBW eege gege 47 Residual FM Resolution bandwidth GEET 47 Restoring Channel Settings 07 2 enr eere 34 Standard files e RESUME Displays eu rer term nete rie re Result displays Matket table 1 5 ie cod tts 18 Peak list D Ge TE In CEET 11 Result Summary Demodulation spectrum nene 54 Evaluatiori method cmo 17 Retrieving values remote 184 Dor 11 reme 71 Data format remote AA 181 183 EXPOMIAG t M 75 Retrieving remote control ssesssse 179 RF attenuation PU 40 Mantel eL 40 septi Eze NEE 55 Eden Tue ET 35 REMOTE E 119 120 RF Power Rr 44 Trigger level remote sees 138 RF Spectrum Evaluation method nr te tnn 16 Troubleshooting RF Time Domain Evaluation method rre ttes 15 S Saving nees tre e e eem eret ds 103 SeltiligS ici tatc dean bate Passmi de tree 32 Scaling db ES Amplitude range automatically Automatic 361 Configuration 2 58 Result Summary 61 piger 61 pco 62 Y axis remote control 130 Sreser layout eR 8 Search Configuration
222. ni TYPE E 163 SENSe JAVERagesns ES TAT6st usii nete bet rete er er XE Ee rr reto ron een YE ikin 163 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution ds IGENSGe IDANDwidtblDBVWlDth DEMod nne nn eterne nnns nennen nnns ins 133 SENS amp BANDwidth BWIDth DEMOG TYPE coo rir pn eoe ntn ee entr Edge 133 SENSE FIL Lee AO FRc 3 5 rrt rete Pre a ib E er ec A e EE Hari n 150 IGENGe Eil Tercnz AMWEIobtedtSTATel enne nennen tentent enn nnn innen 150 SENSe FILTer n CCIR UNWeighted GTATel nnne 150 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT SENSe FIETer n DEMPhasis TCONStarit trennen ner tone teen tee SENSe FilTersn gt DEMPhasis STAT 4 aite irte iret ere ee rin citet E eri een e ERROR ER SENSe FIETer sns HPASS EREQuency MANtll non unter er eorr trip nemen t enne 152 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute esses eene nennen nennt ennt 151 SENSe JFIE Terenti TER ME EE 152 SENSeZFIETer ns EPASs FREQuency MANdUdal ccc root th punti ntn tont re e nena tbe enn 153 SENSe FIETer n E PASS FREQuency RELatiye rrt trn erret nene aes 153 SENSe FILTer n LPASs FREQuency ABSolute eese 152 E SE e E KE EI ENK E 153 SENS amp J FREQ ency CEINTGE soeur eere eret n Pret e ete poca c ee v YE Re eR TENERE 123 SENSe FREQuency GENTer STEP iiiter i iie ei Ec eere Ee Fore E 123 SENSE FREQU
223. o grams for applications based on UO data such as the UO Analyzer and the Analog Demodulation application A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies R amp S VSE K7 Measurement Basics EE Example IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum CF 64 0 MHz 129 pts 250 0 kHz Span 2 5 MHz Spectrogram 1Pk Clrw c N CF 64 0 MHZ 129 pts Frame 0 In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of an R amp S FSW compared to the standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent Spectrogram based on specific trace D The R amp S VSE software allows you to define which trace of a particular result display the Spectrogram is calculated from if multiple traces are available For example if a Spectrum is displayed with a Maxhold a Minhold and an Average trace you can acti vate a Spectrogram that displays the maximum minimum or average power levels over time and frequency Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements mmu CEU a CEN SS aaa User Manual 1176 893
224. odulation application up to 17 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Selected State Specifics for 1 Magnitude 7 The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active iu E 1 ANT 81 m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta ip 81 Selected Marker rcr rant hnic a3 XR sas EAS x0 PECR YR Y EX CARNE TNR EOS E a E3N LER IE 81 SK EE 81 Marker PostHon eeler icc oan er reete aee e o rte ceder dee 82 Maker buo C 82 Reference Marker nnne nnne nere rn rire n eren ee enne nennen nnn 82 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Linking to nei 82 Assigning the Mark r to a TEBGB ciere re RR ERR ERRUTRES SER ERUMRR CEEREPREER FRADRA 82 PAW MATS P EE 83 amp Place New Marker Activates the next currently unused marker and sets it to the peak value of the current trace in the current window If a spectrogram is active an edit field is displayed for the frame number s 0 in which the marker is to be placed vm Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 When you select the arrow on the ma
225. of the instrument in use can be set to 50 Q or 75 O 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 O adapter of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 120 Frequency The center frequency of the input signal is configured in the Frequency tab of the Input Frontend dialog box P To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Frequency tab e Select the Input amp Output gt Frequency menu item Input Source Amplitude LTEM Center Frequency Stepsize Stepsize 0 1 Demod BW 7 X value 50 Et Ee MEIN EE ie eege ee eege gege 41 Center Frequency Stepsize sss entente nnne nen tentes nnne 42 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal 5 4 Trigger Source Settings 0 Hz lt center s fmax fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Note For file input you can shift the center frequency of the current measurement compared to the stored measurement data The maximum shift depends on the chan nel s current analysis bandwidth CFshift CF PW ae ABW file 2 channel If the file does not provide the center frequency it is assumed to be 0 H
226. on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel MAPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event for offline input from a file Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Example TRIG LEV MAP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20
227. on page 152 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 153 SENSe FILTer n LPASs FREQuency MANual on page 153 Weighting Selects a weighting AF filter By default no weighting filter is active A weighted Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz x demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz CCITT Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz CCIR weigh Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in ted the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz x demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz Demodulation Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 151 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 150 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 150 SENSe FILTer n AWEighted STATe on page 150 CCIR unweighted Deemphasis Activates a deemphasis filter with the given time constant Sometimes a modulated signal is extorted by a pre emphasis filter before transmission for example to eliminate fr
228. ontaining the file name You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above In that case you have to include the relative path to the file Manual operation See Save Standard on page 32 Configuring the Input AM Lalo dec E 119 RF Input INPUT eeler EE 119 INPut FIETec HPASSESTATe iiie dedecore A A 119 INPut PIETer VIG STAT ME 120 INPutlMkbedapnee sinaia nadaanan tatam D RR R n ndn n ERR nuce apaa adia kaaa ia m e ERR Dh 120 NPU SELEC eM M 120 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 35 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe State Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the instrument in use in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example Configuring the Measurement This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage
229. other hand is dominated by various shades of red only Fig 4 7 Non linear color curve shape 0 5 Fig 4 8 Spectrogram with shifted color curve 5 QD 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards Configuration Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S VSE General R amp S VSE functions The application independent functions for general tasks on the R amp S VSE are also available for Analog Demodulation measurements and are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality e Controlling Instruments and Capturing UO Data Data Management e General Software Preferences and Information Predefined settings For commonly performed measurements standard setup files are provided for quick and easy configuration Simply load an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapt the measurement settings to your specific requirements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 3 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 243 e Configuration According to Digital Standards 30 e Cotntigurauorj OVS WOW icc eet Sege de trae end enne xe ee 32 e lnputand Frontend Settings nene tese E 34 e Trigger Source Settlligjs uccide ccea penne screen co EUREN KEEN sa Ense a REA R L2 annaa 42 Data P esu mE 46 e B neu m 49 gt OUPO SEUNG pee
230. p On Off PM Time Domain only Activates deactivates the phase wrap On The phase is displayed in the range 180 M For example if the phase exceeds 180 360 is subtracted from the phase value with the display thus showing gt 180 Off The phase is not wrapped This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling 5 6 2 Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated It is configured in the Spectrum tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Spectrum tab Demodulation e Select an active Analog Demodulation Spectrum window then select the Meas Setup Spectrum menu item Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary e AF Evaluati eann aaa I 53 e PR EVA ONE EE 54 5 6 2 1 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain Settings AF Center 1 25 MHz AF Stat 0 0 Hz AF Stop AF Span Specifics for 2 FM Spectrum M xo EM 53 RICE 53 PAE LO EE 53 E ME 54 AF Full Span IER 54 AF Center Defines the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer on page 147 AF Start Defines the start frequency of t
231. parate measurement channel is activated Each measure ment channel can provide multiple result displays which are displayed in individual windows The measurement windows can be rearranged and configured in the R amp S VSE to meet your requirements All windows that belong to the same measure ment including the channel bar are indicated by a colored line at the top of the win dow title bar gt To add further result displays for the Analog Demodulation channel select the 67 Add Window icon from the toolbar or select the Window New Window menu item For details on working with channels and windows see the Operating Basics chapter in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual Basis for evaluation All evaluations are based on the UO data set acquired during the measurement The spectrum of the modulated signal to be evaluated is determined by the demodulation bandwidth However it can be restricted to a limited span AF Span if only part of the signal is of interest Furthermore the time base for evaluations in the time domain can be restricted to analyze a smaller extract in more detail see chapter 4 4 Time Domain Zoom on page 23 Spectrograms Spectrograms are not configured as separate result displays but as a subwindow of any existing graphical result display window They are activated and deactivated in the Spectrogram tab of the Traces settings see chapter 6 3 Spectrogram Settings on page 76 AM De
232. played when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Scaling tab e Select the Meas Setup gt Demod menu item then switch to the Scaling tab Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary Eu AE LES e RUE 59 e age 5772 ME e EE 61 AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations AF Range Db per Division 10 0 dB Ref Position 100 0 96 Ref Value 250 0 kHz oen ues MEETS AF Auto Scale On METEEB Specifics for 6 FM Spectrum SI Dev per Division Db per Division 59 Reference Value POSILUOR 2 tinet oret o ttr ere d ed Te cede easi bte a ede 60 Reference zl TT TTD I LT 60 f lee EET 60 Rtl TORQUE QT TOTNM 61 EE EE 61 Dev per Division Db per Division Defines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation per divi sion logarithmic 0 1 to 20 dB AM display 0 0001 96 to 1000 96 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height Demodulation the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond
233. plification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed 9 4 6 4 Configuring the Measurement INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 128 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the instrument in use RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Scaling the Y Axis DISPlayEWINDowensETRACestEYESCALSe eene n rea rettet ennt n nonet 129 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectstSCALelAUlTOONCE 129 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 130 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 130 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPAQCing 2c cecinit cites idee ue k ese maa sh ad acra un 130 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Range If the y axis shows the power the unit is dB with a range from 10 dB to 200 dB If the y axis shows the frequency the unit is Hz with a variable range RST 100 dB frequency domain 500 kHz time domain Example DI
234. power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only To retrieve negative peak val ues define a second trace with a negative peak detector Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Retrieving Results 9 6 2 Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S VSE User Man ual MMEMory S TORe n SPECtlogram 2 ier a NEEN eed dated PR Rau 182 MMEMancSTORSSInet RAGE E 182 FORMatDEXPaItDS EPIO 1 erase toot demas se EE EES 182 PORMAtDEXP ott HEADE eae rur oretenus terreni vere Ee ie Re vn EP Red 183 FORMAEDEXPGOR DR e 183 MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram lt FileName gt This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Note that depending on the size of the history buffer the process of exporting the data can take a while Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SGR Spectrogram Copies the spectrogram data to a file MMEMor
235. r 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see chapter 4 5 1 Time Frames on page 26 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 166 History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R amp S VSE stores in its memory If the memory is full the R amp S VSE deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 166 Color Mapping Opens the Color Map dialog Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 165 Spectrogram Settings 6 3 2 Color Map Settings The settings for color mapping are displayed in the Color Mapping dialog box that is displayed when you select Color Mapping in the Spectrogram menu or select the color map in the spectrogram display For more information on color maps see chapter 4 5 2 Color Maps on page 27 In addition to the available color settings the dialog box displays the current color map and provides a preview of the display with the current settings Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram 40dBm Start 039 Stop 9 Hot Radar Grayscale Set to Default Specifics for 1 Spectrum 7 Fig 6 1 Color Mapping dialog box 1 Color map shows
236. r Source Settings on page 42 Note that the availability of trigger settings depends on the instrument in use QD OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned 9 4 8 1 e Configuring the Triggering Conditions ence een ttt ns 135 e Configuring the Trigger Output 142 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use TRIGger SEQuence D TIM 2 aae irr terere Eo SNE delen 136 TRIGSer SEQuencelHOLDo TIME EE 136 TRIGger SEQuence IFPowerHOLJJOfr 2 2 2 3 riter eere gane eu oh REESEN EEN 136 TRIGger SEQuence IFPowerHYS Teresis traitent nnne thon ne kun EEEE 136 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port csse nenne 137 RRE EE ER E 137 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelIQPOWSr 2 coa oct iere eee Led eaa eau 137 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel MAPower cesses enne nnne nennen r nnn nnns 138 TRIGger SEQuence E LEVel RPPQWOEE icti toe ur eub teen Ert dna 138 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative 2 dct eicere e v eo va kPa penu 138 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel AM ABSolute essere nennen 139 TRIGger SEQuence EL EVeliEM iiiieirie eue ctetur
237. r u sn nane rr annua nma inns 232 WE LC inj M 235 Ad Menu Reference eit rate tetti toti teen 235 A 2 Reference of Toolbar Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeneneenenennnn nennen nnne nnns 239 A 3 Predefined Standards and Settings essent 243 AA Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 245 A 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format eeseeeeeeeeereeeeeee eene 245 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemopQ 248 It 255 R amp SSVSE K7 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general software functions and settings common to all applica tions and operating modes are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and sett
238. rigger Output on page 142 DIAGHOStie SERVICGNS QUEGS ocior ceo utet EEN n pae ka APEX ee a EBEN Te UU ob auo an AERE RS 121 OUTPUTADEMOd ONLINE STATE uit cam tentur e ee ere Pa dieto 121 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURGS 1 iu iocus accu ud a ata NONE a ee LEVE EA 122 OUTPut ADEMoq ONLine AF CFRequency eese nennen nnne 122 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONES eren enne ener nnns nsn nr nnn re ne 122 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the instrument in use on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 64 This command enables or disables online demodulation output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S VSE Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM ON Manual operation See Online Demodulation Output State on page 66 Configuring the Measurement OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce lt WindowName gt This command selects the result display whose results are output Only active time domain results can be selected Parameters lt WindowName gt lt string gt String containing the name of the window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query FOCus
239. rizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event 9 7 1 4 Marker Search Settings The following commands define criteria for searches Ee TE E ET E GT de DIE EE 203 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB ADEMOD RF dB ADEMOD AM PCT ADEMOD FM kHz ADEMOD PM RAD Parameters Excursion The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST 5 PCT in AM displays 50 kHz in FM displays 0 5 RAD in PM displays 9 7 1 5 Analyzing Results Example CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 85 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Nornmal Markers obere nien ta dee aA Ra aug Fue Er DEAL po EX Ery aaia 204 e Positioning Delta Markers enne 206 Posi
240. rker selection list in the toolbar or select a marker from the Marker Select Marker menu the marker is activated and an edit dialog box is displayed to enter the marker position X value If a spectrogram is active the frame number x 0 in which the marker is to be placed can also be defined To deactivate a marker select the marker name in the marker selection list in the tool bar not the arrow to display the Select Marker dialog box Change the State to Off Marker 1 is always the default reference marker for relative measurements If activa ted markers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Type function Several markers can be configured very easily using the Marker dialog box see chapter 6 4 1 1 Individual Marker Setup on page 80 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 190 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 192 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 192 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 193 For spectrogram display CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 200 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 196 S
241. rmal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Analyzing Results Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See vw Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 See Marker State on page 81 See Marker Type on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns
242. rmats that are available for all R amp S VSE applica tions are not described here See the R amp S VSE User Manual for a description of the standard functions Trace and data export settings can be configured in the Traces dialog box Trace Data Export tab Trace Data Export Configuration Traces Trace Data Export Copy E Export all Traces and all Table Results 7 Include Instrument amp Measurement Settings Trace to Export 1 xj Decimal Separator Comma Export Trace to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results ec ie 75 Include Instrument Measurement Geittngs 75 Re o0 sec E E E A E nenesavyedcaelacsaneccseciyyaatetaneets 75 Decimal SGParaton ET 75 Export Trace to ASGII EE 75 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 183 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data See chapter A 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 245 for details Remote co
243. rogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 87 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Analyzing Results If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 86 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only
244. rta e nnn e ERE Cu nna kenne phare aD nain 139 TRiGger SEQuence LEV GPM ccs aereo tree ete dauern te ene e teda p petet ex tenes 139 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDOff eee esent ennt 139 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis cessisse enne nennen 140 Configuring the Measurement TRiGger_SEQuence SLOPE EE 140 qRIGSer oEQuence Ee BEE 140 TRIGger SEQuenceJ TIME RINTerval esses enne nnne nenne rere nnns 141 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 45 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword For offline input from a file this command does not apply In this case use TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff on page 139 Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source
245. s Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 130 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 130 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed They are configured in the Units tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the Units tab 5 7 5 7 1 Output Settings e Select the Meas Setup gt Units menu item Demod Spectrum AF Filter Scaling Specifics for 1 FM Time Domain 7 Phase Unit FSad IDOQ rper ta nir raa Re ee t Ra tg te ence 3a dp e 63 NR ele ga A IB i neenon ee ent o ee det res eat ode Der licae ene Pe ned 63 Phase Unit Rad Deg Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT lt n gt ANGLe on page 155 THD Unit
246. s The following commands are required to configure the special marker functions that are available in the Analog Demodulation application e Fixed Reference Marker Settings esisessiseeeesee tenen enata teas 208 e REES 210 e PGB DOW Market erri pone eter n ta cha Eon eee Ie nu eaa c a SERA E 213 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker eese nennen nennen 216 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 208 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint 3 208 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 209 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet ssuss 209 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe senes 209 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint X RefPoint This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Analy
247. s the search is automatically performed in all frames above or below the currently selected frame respectively Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 204 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 206 Search Minimum NY Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 205 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 207 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated e Yy For spectrogram displays define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in For the Next Min Up Down functions the search is automatically performed in all frames above or below the currently selected frame respectively Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 207 6 4 3 Special Marker Functions In addition to basic markers sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results e Defining a Fixed Reference Marke 87 e Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker 88 e Measuring Phase INOoIse icit iere mL cre LEGE a EE eR E EG 89 e Marker Function Conflguration iere tne ett Renee eR SEENEN 89 6 4 3 1 Defining a Fi
248. s always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM AM RELative TDOMain Adds an AM Time Domain display below window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See AM Time Domain on page 12 See FM Time Domain on page 12 See PM Time Domain on page 13 See AM Spectrum on page 13 See FM Spectrum on page 14 See PM Spectrum on page 15 See RF Time Domain on page 15 See RF Spectrum on page 16 See Result Summary
249. s assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 9 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 9 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numere Values ee HR ina HERE ge reo Fase ise toes ane vto wend AE DUREE teas 114 le EE 115 e Uharacter D rerte et trie enu Pete e Fen Y rr v band o cu aa de de Eod 116 Gharacter E CET 116 MBI OG Ie Wp EE 116 9 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basi
250. s see chapter 6 6 Zoom Functions on page 106 State Time Domain Zoom Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom mode ON Activates the time domain zoom Demodulation OFF Deactivates the time domain zoom and restores the original display If more measured values than measurement points are available sev eral measured values are combined in one measurement point according to the method of the selected trace detector Remote command SENSe ADEMod n Z0OM STATe on page 146 Start Time Domain Zoom Defines the start time for the time domain zoom area For spectrum evaluations the start time is always 0 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 146 Length Time Domain Zoom Defines the length of the time domain zoom area Enter the length as a time value manually or use the Auto setting to set the length to the current number of sweep points automatically Remote command SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGth on page 145 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 145 Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only Defines the position at which the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to O rad The entry is made with respect to time In the default setting the first measured value is set to O rad This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PM RPOint X on page 187 Phase Wra
251. s see ess s snae nis 94 fn GB down Delta EE 94 6 5 6 5 1 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 214 n dB down Delta Value Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or time span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 214 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 215 Deactivating All Marker Functions All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Use the All Functions Off button in the Marker Functions dialog box Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Limit lines are available for the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application e Basics on Limit LINGS pega eee epe nde seas beret Vena etc bua ocu eve ae t Vp de cote 94 s Limit Gne Settirigs arid WT Lee CN 97 e Defining Limit Lines tere Een ene dee ande 103 Basics on Limit Lines Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in the result diagram which are not to be exceeded They indicate for example the upper limits for interference radiation or spurious waves w
252. s the color mapping to the default settings Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault on page 168 6 4 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demod ulation application Basically markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application are very similar to those in the UO Analyzer However some additional functions are available Markers in Spectrogram Displays ED In Spectrograms you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the x value you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visi ble that are positioned on a visible frame Marker Sons uni niit node ei eed eder n ne E alten ee 79 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning Funchons 85 e Special Marker Funchons ettn nn aan KE EEEn nananana 87 6 4 1 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER menu or in the Marker dialog box Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab In the Marker menu select lt Marker Ee ER E EE 80 e General Marker Gettings nennen nnns 83 6 4 1 1 Individual Marker Setup In the Analog Dem
253. se data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 9 2 Common Suffixes In the Analog Demodulation application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description lt k gt 1 8 Limit line m 1 16 Marker Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Suffix Value range Description n 1 x Window or Evaluation lt t gt 1 6 Trace 9 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Analog Demodulation measurements require a special application in the R amp S VSE The common commands for configuring and controlling measurement channels as well as blocks and sequences are also used in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application They are described in the R amp S VSE Base Software User Manual 9 4 Configuring the Measurement The following remote commands are required to configure an Analog Demodulation measurement e Restoring the Default Configuration Preset ee 117 Managing Standard El e EE 118 LE Configuring Wale Te m 119 e COMMUTING TS TT EE 121 Ee ue E 123 e Configuring
254. seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 156 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 156 Adjusting Settings Automatically Upper Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 157 Lower Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 157 Trace Settings 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analy
255. set Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 126 Unit Reference Level The instrument in use measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 35 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 120 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 125 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 69 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 126 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Input and Frontend Settings Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This
256. settings file on the software or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version gt user File Name Setup Standard Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S VSE User Manual Load Standard Setup Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STANdard on page 118 Configuration Overview Save Standard Setup Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PRESet STORe on page 119 Delete Standard Setup Standard Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards function see Restore Standard Files
257. sis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tions in the base unit except for the special marker functions The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 9 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 111 Trace SOUMOS EM 71 s Trace Data Export COMNGURAUOM uci tnde b ee ine et ear ee 74 e Spectogram le uoce ioi den era dein rece ven e Pi de 76 e Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 79 e Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application 94 e ZOOM FUNCIONS erran reed edi acd eia EE E rre Ene 106 6 1 Trace Settings You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces The trace settings are configured in the Traces dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis then switch to the vertical Traces tab Select the Trace gt Trace menu item In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Trace Settings Trace Math Spectrogram Quick Config T Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode L Preset Ali Max Avg Min it Max CirWrite Min J Specifics for 1 Magnitude 7 Trace 1 Trace 2 Tra
258. solution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 203 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value SOIGBE MISES EE 86 Peak Search recte tectae a edite eret ta tn Pas en rr e d c ee i d 86 Search Next EE 87 Search IR ERUIT cocucdacer sete pereo N nce deduc qa dee ue dx rues dope oodd Sd NY 87 Search Next MINIMUM cce cte e p eate deter na e e nn rcd e d enn a f E d 87 Select Marker Mi r The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Peak Search N Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 204 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 206 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Y AA For spectrogram displays define which frame the next peak is to be searched in For the Next Peak Up Down function
259. splayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 195 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the mouse wheel Standard The marker position is moved in Span 1000 steps which corre sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 sweep points This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Points The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe on page 194 Defining a Fixed Reference Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis When you set the State to On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are dis played marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed refer ence marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker If activated the fixed reference marker FXD can also be selected as a Reference
260. ssen geed ae t epe Re EE ge 147 SERA C e dees 148 SENSeJADENIGS MAAF STOP cea eoe deat xta togata eroe teneret den vine tdeo pott exti tpa 148 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer Frequency This command sets the center frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 1 25 MHz Manual operation See AF Center on page 53 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for AF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Span gt RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF SPAN 200 kHz Sets the AF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See AF Span on page 54 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN FULL This command sets the maximum span for AF spectrum result display The maximum span corresponds to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 Configuring the Measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM BAND 5 MHz Sets the demodulation bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF SPAN FULL Sets the AF span to 2 5 MHz Manual operation See AF Full Span on page 54 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 0 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets
261. t FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only Analyzing Results MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the pathname and extension of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test dat Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event
262. t SPEC gram EC ET 165 CALGulate n SGRam FRAMe CO DNI icri asut ceca dia a P RV Rau d 165 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNtE esses nerh rrr nnns 165 CAL Culate nz GGhamERAMe GE ect 166 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect esses ener 166 CAL Culate lt n S 6 Rani HDEPIL E 166 CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram HDEPU dnienai kiireen iaaii 166 Configuring the Measurement CALGulatesm SORA OZ E eicere te aa Dr t are eed 167 GALCulate sn SPEGlrogramkSIZE seat e torte EE roe RR nen RE YRR CR XERER Ren eR ERE gmkeR 167 CALCulate n SGRam STATe iiis se essen aannaaien naeia aiana didida 167 cCALCulatesm SPECtregramps TANT daa enero au ree age eene et e xtd t te a tee nre nea 167 CAL e E Eh KEE 167 GAL Gulatesns SPEGClrograme TRAGS etii tin detenta d e ERR e ERE IU aeui dra din a des 167 CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer lt n gt is irrelevant Example CALC SGR CLE Resets the result display and clears the memory Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Spectrogram on page 49 CALCulate n SGRam CONT State CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CONT State This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode lt n gt is irrelevant P
263. t Settings The result display currently used for output is indicated by a Demod Out label in the window title bar Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce on page 122 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUP1ing on page 144 AC Cutoff Frequency Defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see AF Coupling Note that the audio frequency AF filter settings used for demodulation also apply to the online output See chapter 5 6 3 AF Filter on page 55 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency on page 122 Phones Output In addition to send
264. t TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the evaluated signal in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see FORMat DATA on page 181 The trace results are configured for a specific evaluation n is irrelevant The follow ing table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method as well as the output unit of the results Command syntax Evaluation method Output unit AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain dBm AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum 96 FM TDOMain FM time domain kHz FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum kHz PM TDOMain PM time domain rad or PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum rad or SPECtrum RF spectrum dBm logarithmic display or V linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENS ADEM lt Evaluation gt TYPE see SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum TYPE on page 161 Otherwise a query error is generated Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH Sets up RF time domain results to be measured INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync F
265. t check for each limit line is indicated in the dia gram If a violation occurs the limit check status is set to MARG for a margin viola tion or to FAIL for a limit violation R amp S VSE K7 Analysis Limit Check M1 1 30 79 dBm Line UPPER LIMIT LINE 1 0000002000 GHz Span 50 0 kHz Analog Demod 2 Marker Table X Value Function 1 0000002 GHz ndB 999 999051 MHz ndB down BW Q Factor Fig 6 4 Margin violation for limit check Limit Check M1 1 30 79 dBm Line UPPER LIMIT LINE 1 0000002000 GHz 1001 pts Span 50 0 kHz Fig 6 5 Limit violation for limit check 6 5 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R amp S VSE Many more can be stored on the instrument User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 97 6 5 2 1 Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Limit Line Management Limit lines are managed in the Line Config dialog box which is displayed when you select the Limits gt Line menu item Name unit compatibte visibte Check Traces Copy To Delete Disable All Lines View Filter Show Compatible 9 Show All V Show Lines for all Modes Specifics for 2 FM Spectrum Zj For the limit line overview the R amp S VSE searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder The overview allows you to determine which limit
266. tab e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data on the Scaling tab 7 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the demodulation displays For example e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Data Acquisition settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the demodulated signal on the Marker tab e Use special marker functions to calculate phase noise or an n dB down band width on the Marker Config tab e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations on the Lines tab 8 Select the Capture icon from the toolbar to start a new measurement with the defined settings 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations consider the following notes and tips to optimize the measurement Determining the demodulation bandwidth A frequent cause for measurement errors and false results is an incorrectly defined demodulation bandwidth DBW If the DBW is too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the demodulated range That means that any noise or additional signal parts may be included in the measured results which are then false On the other hand if the DBW is too small part of the signal is cut off and thus not included in the calcula
267. ted and displayed in more detail using the Time Domain Zoom function This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point repre sents a large time span The time domain zoom function distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise 1 FM Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz 1 FM Time Domain Time per DIVISION Start 0 0 Fig 4 3 FM time domain measurement with time domain zoom 2 0 ms per division The time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evalua tion for the current window SSS gt E gt S A User Manual 1176 8939 02 02 23 Working with Spectrograms In contrast to the time domain zoom the graphical zoom is available for all diagram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same t t 4 45 t 4 45 5 Time domain zoom Graphical zoom 4 5 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A special feature of the R amp S VSE software is that it provides spectr
268. th the manually defined frequency is used Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 152 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 151 SENSe FILTer n HPASs FREQuency MANual on page 152 Demodulation Low Pass Defines a low pass filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available Absolute low pass filters Absolute filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Filter type Demodulation bandwidth 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz s demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Manual A low pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in 96 of the demodulation bandwidth The fil ters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the AF low pass filter default Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 153 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute
269. the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Start on page 53 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Frequency RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Stop on page 53 RF evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 123 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 Specific commands ie e EE e een 149 SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MANimum eene 149 9 4 9 4 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for RF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to the demodulation bandwidth see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 133 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Span RST 5 MHz Example ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 200 kHz Sets the rF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See Span on page 55 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum lt FreqRange gt Sets the DBW to the specified value and the span around th
270. the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode The unit depends on the application of the command Table 9 3 Analog demodulation measurements Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit AM result display lin R amp S VSE K7 dB log FM result display Hz lin R amp S VSE K7 dB log 9 7 1 2 Analyzing Results Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit PM result display rad deg lin R amp S VSE K7 dB log RF result display dB Range Log or Range Linear R amp S VSE K7 Range Linear Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAL Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 1
271. the selected UO data file Remote command INPut SELect on page 120 Input File Specifies the UO data file to be used for input Select Select File to open the Load UO File dialog box See Data Management Loading the UO Data File in the R amp S VSE User Manual Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude tab of the Input Frontend dialog box Amplitude settings are identical to the base unit For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S VSE User Manual Input and Frontend Settings Input Settings Preamplifier on ECH mout couino MEN oc Impedance 5092 750 Electronic Attenuation State On Off Specifics for 4 Result Summary gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the Input amp Output gt Amplitude Config menu item Reference level e A ENNA EEA M 38 L Shifting the Display Offset 39 a wc E E 39 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 39 Mechanical Attenuation tco conta seite FR eR E Dee E ud ed Ra 39 L Attenuation Mode Value retener tne ttnnnte tnn tette 40 Using Electronic ATBImuUallont ccrto tte ttc rt e n tice rete beer ee tdg 40 Hsu as 40 L Bop GANA E 40 EM ort NINE TE QE D REPRE 41 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference
272. the tab label for the measurement channel lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Configuring the Result Display Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY GLOB CAT Result IQ Analyzer 1 1 2 2 Analog Demod 1 1 4 4 For the UO Analyzer channel two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right For the Analog Demodulation channel two windows are dis played named 1 at the top or left and 4 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the specified chan nel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ 1 RIGH Spectrum FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 Example LAYout GLOBal IDENtify IQ Analyzer Spectrum Result 2 Window index is 2 Usage Query only LAYout GLOBal REMove
273. tion See Phones Output on page 67 9 4 5 Frequency Settings SENSeJFREQUEBDCYr CENTO EE 123 ISENGe JrbRtOuencv CENTer STEP 123 ISENSe FREQueihcy CENTERSTEPILING 2 tror edere tee e tege cett Eege 124 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINKCFEAG TOF iriiria oe tecta rever ores aad NEEN 124 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 41 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 123 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT
274. tion See Shift y on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing Interpol Type This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 102 See Y Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 222 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 99 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R amp S VSE uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 222 RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 102 Analyzing Results 9 7 2 2 Managing Limit Lines Useful commands for managing limit lines described in the R amp S VSE User Manual MMEM SEL ITEM LIN ALL e MMEM STOR TYPE e MMEM LOAD TYPE Remote co
275. tion of the results An easy way to determine the required DBW is to display the RF spectrum of the input signal If the entire signal is displayed there and takes up most of the diagram width the DBW should be appropriate For further recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chap ter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 22 Adjusting the displayed span Be aware that the span of the RF Spectrum display is not automatically increased for a wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum may not show the entire demodula ted bandwidth In this case you must increase the span manually to show the entire signal Determining the SINAD and THD The signal to noise and distortion ratio SINAD and the total harmonic distortion THD of the demodulated signal are a good indicator of the signal quality sent by the DUT Both values are calculated inside the AF spectrum span and thus only if an AF spectrum window is displayed If either value deviates strongly from the expected result make sure the demodulation bandwidth is defined correctly see Determining the demodulation bandwidth 9 Remote Commands for Analog Demodula tion Measurements The commands required to perform measurements in the Analog Demodulation appli cation in a remote environment are described here It is assumed that the R amp S VSE has already been
276. tioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXim UM LEET 204 CAL Culate nz M bkermzMAximumNENT snas nes sn sna 204 CALOCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK sese 204 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximumbRlGHt eee es nsns nnns s nsns n nsa 205 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimum LEET 205 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT esee en nn nnns naris nnns 205 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cesses nnne 205 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz MiNimum BIG 206 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 87 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the curren
277. tivates the Spectrogram result display Manual operation See State on page 77 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam TRACe lt Trace gt CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram TRACe Trace This command determines the trace in the result display the Spectrogram is based on Query parameters lt Trace gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACES TRACE6 How many traces are available depends on the selected result display Example CALC2 SPEC TRAC TRACE3 Configuring the Measurement 9 4 12 2 Configuring the Color Map DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor DEFault nene 168 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault esses 168 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor LOWer leise aniria i 168 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer esses 168 DISPlayEWINDowensISGRam COLorSHAPe tree tr reddantur e Aiea 168 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe essent 168 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer esses nnne nnne rnnt 169 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer seessssssseseeeenen eene 169 DISPlayEWINDow lt n SGRam COLGn S TYLg tau tot ttt le eerte e een 169 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor S TYLe i eicit natia 169 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Usage Event Manual operation
278. tl t e de x a 76 Color Map SOWING ee ER 78 6 3 1 General Spectrogram Settings This section describes general settings for spectrogram display They are available when you press the TRACE key and then select the Spectrogram Config softkey Traces Copy Trace Trace Math Color Mapping State End Full Off Settings Select Frame 50 History Depth 3000 Trace a Color Mapping Clear Spectrogram Specifics for 2 Spectrum 7 Spectrogram Settings zc EN 77 SEISCUNG a frame to display cui tee E Rer a ep tede RR true 77 PUSEONY IDG o jr RR Em 77 color Eer UM 77 Clear SpOottogram EE 77 State Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow Split Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result dis play Full Displays the Spectrogram in a subwindow in the full size of the origi nal result display Off Closes the Spectrogram subwindow Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram STATe on page 167 CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram SIZE on page 167 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is numbe
279. tly selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Analyzing Results If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 86 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 87 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level In a spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontal
280. to the actual display Reference Value Position Determines the position of the reference value for the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 96 correspond ing to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the AF time evaluations and 100 96 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum evalua tions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 130 Reference Value Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value can be set specifically for each evaluation e AF time display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling setting permits automatic correction by the average frequency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously e AF spectrum display In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values e AM 0 and 10000 96 e FM 0 and 10 MHz e PM 0 and 10000 rad Note The reference value for the AF range in the window title bar is displayed with respect to the defined reference position The position may vary for different windows For time domain and frequency domain
281. to the trace mode Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 73 Configuring Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time spectrum traces the R amp S VSE also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see chapter 6 3 Spectrogram Settings on page 76 When configuring spectrograms the window suffix is irrelevant The settings are always applied to the spectrogram window or to all spectrogram windows if several are active for the same measurement channel For commands to set markers in spectrograms see chapter 9 7 1 3 Marker Search Spectrograms on page 195 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement 164 Configuring the Color Map 1 iiri ced aaia eee 168 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement CALCulate lt n gt SGRam CLEar IMMediate ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeeeenecenaenaanene 165 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate sees 165 CAL Culateem SGRamt C OINT sacs scot cape rper petet RENE apa uo Ce Span o 165 CAL Culatesm g
282. ts the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 18 See Marker Peak List on page 19 See wi Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Analyzing Results Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 82 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK TO MARKer m State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE Mode This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker for all delta markers m is
283. uence LEVel IFPower on page 137 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 137 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 137 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 138 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative on page 138 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute on page 139 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM on page 139 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM on page 139 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel MAPower on page 138 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger If supported by the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 136 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power or Magnitude offline trigger sources The range of the value depends on the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 136 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis on page 140 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 136 Data Acquisition Slope For all trigger sources except time
284. ulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELoOw eese nennen CAL Culate nzMAhkercm SGGhbRamvMAimumNENT nennen nene neret nrennr enne CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINiIMUM ABOVE 0 0 ee eee essen een eene CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELOwW essere CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT esses enne siridir CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK esee 199 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe esses enne nnne nennen neret ense 196 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea 1 nante tnn eh nnn hene node ne nans 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK sese 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK esses 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWe esee 197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw esee 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimumg PEAK eese 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MiNimum AbPOVe eene 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELOwW eene 198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT sese
285. ulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker LSS gt S
286. ult display in window 1 by a marker table for the AnalogDemod channel 9 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the Screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel To configure the layout of windows across measurement channels use the chap ter 9 5 1 Global Layout Commands on page 170 UNS qois ADDEWINDOW Fas ER 174 LAYout CATalog WINDoOW ecice eina cu e tnnt the nn Enn nebenan aaa ia ha dao Ead 175 Bd freie GET 175 LAYout REMoveEWINDOWg 5 2 necu co cota tice ne entree aeree vanae cecus tecto ENEE 176 LAYout REPLacs WINDOW aeree Rune rhon erroe poke hne e Hank CES 176 Configuring the Result Display LAYOURWINDOWS A gt ADD EE 177 LAY out WINDoOwen DENT ciae ceto au eor Ea Ea EEEE EEA ETER 177 LAYOBUSEWINBDOWSHPSIREMONG nicer ir casei aenea ope taedio to nerd EES E EEN EEN 178 LAY oun WINDOW n gt REPLAGe nra tre ditate ENEE edd 178 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command i
287. uous on page 158 SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 144 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 130 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 130 Specific commands DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue enses eene 154 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Parameters Value RST AM time domain 0 PCT FM time domain 0 Hz PM time domain 0 rad AM spectrum 100 PCT FM spectrum 250 kHz PM spectrum 10 rad Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz Manual operation See Reference Value on page 60 9 4 9 7 Scaling for RF Evaluation These commands are required for RF evaluations and the result summary DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 130 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 130 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 129 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 130 9 4 9 8 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed LNT Sti ANGLE EE 155 HIN D E 155 9 4 10 Configuring the Measurement UNIT lt n gt ANGLe Unit This command se
288. ured in the AF Filter tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box D AF filters are only available for AF time domain evaluations Demodulation AF filters are configured in the AF Filter tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Analog Demodulation Overview select the Demod Settings button then select the AF Filter tab e Select the Meas Setup gt AF Filter menu item Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit High Pass Low Pass Weighting Deemphasis 50 Hz None None None bd All Filters Off Specifics for 1 FM Time Domain 7 FGM PASS ii 56 OW PASS C ET 57 jue 57 DSI SSIS E 58 peacuvaung alll ebe cect c ae gege Eeer 58 High Pass Defines a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range None No AF Filter used default 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth s 8 MHz Manual A high pass filter wi
289. vant Parameters Comment String containing the description of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 101 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA If not the R amp S VSE either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit is Hz or s RST Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain lt SpanSetting gt This command selects the domain of the limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanSetting gt FREQuency TIME RST FREQuency Manual operation See X Axis on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time
290. vated Configure Selected Result Window Displays the Window Configuration dialog box to configure result specific settings Help Menu The Help menu provides access to help support and licensing functions For a description of these functions see the Basic Operations and General Software Settings chapters in the R amp S VSE User Manual Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Help P Opens the Online help window License Licensing version and options information Support Support functions Register VSE Attempts to create an email with the default mail program if available to the Rohde amp Schwarz support address for registra tion Online Support Opens the default web browser and attempts to establish an Internet connection to the Rohde amp Schwarz product site About Software version information Analog Demodulation Menus The following menus are only available if an Analog Demodulation measurement chan nel is selected Input amp Output MORI neriiirisrirsin crane zeit re Fate neret e opaco Eee rn cte 238 Meds Setup MOR nct dtt ene o gd 238 s TEENE a a 238 Marker MoM ranun aa a A EE A O 239 lun Te EE 239 A 1 2 1 A 1 2 2 A 1 2 3 Menu Reference Input amp Output Menu The Input amp Output menu provides functions to configure the input source frontend parameters and output settings for the measurement
291. ve peak PK MPEak NPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 RMS Root mean square value Retrieving Results Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 17 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult This command queries the carrier power which is determined from the Clr Write data lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CPower gt Power of the carrier without modulation in dBm Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt This command queries the carrier offset frequency error for FM and PM demodula tion The carrier offset is determined from the current measurement data CLR WRITE The modulation is removed using low pass filtering The offset thus determined differs from that calculated in the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet command which uses averaging to determine the frequency deviation lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CarrOffset gt The deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal car rier frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt This co
292. ved form the display How to edit existing limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Edit button 3 Edit the line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 105 4 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button If the limit line is active the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram How to copy an existing limit line 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Copy To button 3 Define a new name to create a new limit with the same configuration as the source line 4 Editthe line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 105 5 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated Working with Limit Lines in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application How to delete an existing limit line 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The limit line and the results of the limit check are deleted How to configure a new limit line 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the New button The Edit Limit Line dialog box is displayed The current line configuration is dis played in the preview area of the dialog box The preview is updated after each change to the
293. windows for example a different reference value may be displayed although the same reference is actually used but the posi tions vary Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 154 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Demodulation e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUP1ing on page 144 Deviation Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 130 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum m
294. with Markers Remotely on page 187 e Marker Search Setuhig5 ute tet rede iet SEENEN 85 Positioning FUMCUOMNS 3 E 86 Marker Search Settings Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results These settings are available in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab e Select the Marker gt Search menu item Searcit Mode for Next Peak aio eret rae ed Me EM ot Der ebd adu 85 xz Eltre m 85 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 9 7 1 5 Positioning the Marker on page 204 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions 6 4 2 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S VSE Analog Demodulation application Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the re
295. xed Reference Marker Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once R amp S VSE K7 Analysis 6 4 3 2 positioned the reference marker does not move during subsequent sweeps unless you explicitely move it manually Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker When characterizing the shape of a signal the bandwidth at a specified offset from its peak level is often of interest The offset is specified as a relative decrease in ampli tude of n dB In order to measure this bandwidth you could use several markers and delta markers and determine the bandwidth manually However using the n dB down marker function makes the task very simple and quick The n dB down marker function uses the current value of marker 1 as the reference point It activates two temporary markers T1 and T2 located on the signal whose level is n dB below the level of the reference point Marker T1 is placed to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker The default setting for n is 3 dB but it can be changed If a positive offset is entered the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer ence point If a negative value is entered for example for notch filter measurements the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference point 3 Analog Demod 1 RF Spectrum e 1AP Clrw og Span 50 0 kHz
296. y WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE sess DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent s DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVVel essere nnne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSItION 0 eee eee c eee teasers eceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeenneeens DISPlay WINDowsn gt TRAGe st S l ATe enter tern tte etie er the rn ennt tnnt BISPlay WINDowsn T ZOOM AREA sporne oneri tore notre tain GEES een DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essent nennen ienie DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sess enne rennes BISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM S VAT C eet caso trepida n qa epe oppor epu PERSE be KEERN FORMat DEXPort DSEPafalor itr rre tr rre eo re ern P agen n e Peer n e e v RR RE Pe gen FORMaEDEXPOort HEADrF EE FORMAGCDEXP On IRA GC FORMat DATA E aiY INPut ATTenuation siiis sw RRE IR AUTO ll ege ell Jerome IST ER EE leie a RE EE ly zio sr a ERR INPutFILTer HPASSESTATe s ieee terreri rre rene ir er rt kr th eror tr e er hentai rege INPut FILTer YIG STATe lege T EXP INFuGAINEV Atuek TT
297. y the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Analyzing Results Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE on page 191 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 81 See Marker Position X value on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to
298. y STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 183 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 75 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt Example Manual operation Retrieving Results COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator See Decimal Separator on page 75 See Exporting the Peak List on page 93 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported See chapter A 5 Reference ASCII F
299. y default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query Configuring the Result Display lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout WINDow n ADD Direction WindowType This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 174 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channe
300. z Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 123 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be coupled to the demodulation bandwidth or it can be manually set to a fixed value 0 1 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth This is the default setting 0 5 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth X Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined fac Bw tor of the demodulation bandwidth The X Factor defines the per centage of the demodulation bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to the demodulation bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 124 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 124 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 123 Trigger Source Settings Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your demodulated signals
301. zing Results Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 84 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe State This command activates or deactivates a marker that defines a fixed reference point for relative marker analysis If necessary the command activates a marker and

R&S VSE-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S VSE-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S VSE-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual